WO2024046837A1 - Composés de tryptamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation - Google Patents

Composés de tryptamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024046837A1
WO2024046837A1 PCT/EP2023/073122 EP2023073122W WO2024046837A1 WO 2024046837 A1 WO2024046837 A1 WO 2024046837A1 EP 2023073122 W EP2023073122 W EP 2023073122W WO 2024046837 A1 WO2024046837 A1 WO 2024046837A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
unsubstituted
group
deuterium
hydrogen
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2023/073122
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Alex Nivorozhkin
Joshua A. HARTSEL
Clinton E. CANAL
Tina A. MUELLER
Kenneth L. Avery
Geoffrey B. VARTY
Francesco G. Salituro
Michael Palfreyman
Original Assignee
Cybin Irl Limited
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Cybin Irl Limited filed Critical Cybin Irl Limited
Publication of WO2024046837A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024046837A1/fr

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/14—Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms, not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C07D209/16—Tryptamines
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to tryptamine compounds, compositions, and, in some embodiments, to serotonin 5-HT 2 receptor agonists and uses in the treatment of diseases associated with a 5-HT 2 receptor.
  • serotonin 5-HT 2 receptors There are three, closely related subtypes of serotonin 5-HT 2 receptors (5-HT 2 Rs), 5- HT 2A , 5-HT 2B , and 5-HT 2C , and they are primary targets of classic serotonergic psychedelics, such as lysergic acid diethylamide (LSD), 2,5-dimethoxy-4-bromoamphetamine (DOB), N,N- dimethyltryptamine (DMT), 5-methoxy-N,N-dimethyltryptamine (5-MeO-DMT), psilocybin and its active dephosphorylated form, psilocin.
  • LSD lysergic acid diethylamide
  • DOB 2,5-dimethoxy-4-bromoamphetamine
  • DMT N,N- dimethyltryptamine
  • 5-MeO-DMT 5-methoxy-N,N-dimethyltryptamine
  • Each subtype is expressed in a unique pattern in mammals (both in peripheral tissues and in the central nervous system), and when stimulated, produces unique biochemical, physiological, and behavioral effects.
  • Activation of 5-HT 2A RS for example, predominantly mediates psychedelic effects and elicits anti- inflammatory effects, whereas activation of 5-HT 2 cRs reduces feeding behavior.
  • Chronic activation of 5-HT 2B RS has been linked to valvular heart disease (VHD), a life- threatening adverse event (AE).
  • VHD valvular heart disease
  • AE life- threatening adverse event
  • OCD obsessive- compulsive disorder
  • ANS autonomic nervous system
  • pulmonary disorders e.g., asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder (COPD)
  • cardiovascular disorders e.g., atherosclerosis
  • 5-MeO-DMT lacks oral bioavailability and is instead ordinarily vaporized and inhaled to produce psychedelic effects.
  • Psilocybin and psilocin also undergo MAO-mediated metabolism in vivo, which is believed to contribute to significant patient-to-patient pharmacokinetic variability.
  • the duration of action of certain tryptamine psychedelics is so short, 5-15 minutes in the case of DMT and 5-MeO- DMT, as to limit their use in effective therapies.
  • One object of the present disclosure is to provide novel tryptamine compounds which meet these criteria, as well as compositions thereof, and methods of using the same to treat diseases, e.g., those associated with a serotonin 5-HT 2 receptor. More specifically, the present disclosure provides novel fluorinated tryptamine analogs and compositions thereof, that can be used to treat neuropsychiatric disorders, central nervous system (CNS) disorders, neurodegenerative diseases, and other disorders, such as those associated with inflammation.
  • CNS central nervous system
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkoxy, and -OPO 3 H 2 ;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f ;
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and Rr
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O)2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine
  • R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 ,
  • R 6 , and R 7 are hydrogen.
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f .
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ; R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f ; or alternatively R
  • (31) The compound of any one of (22) to (30), which is selected from the group consisting of or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof.
  • (32) The compound of (1), having a structure of Formula (III), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, wherein:
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form the heterocycloalky
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, and -ORr;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and - S(O) 2 R; f or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ,
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form the heterocycloalky
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising: a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof; and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, wherein: X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f ;
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R5, R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form
  • a method of treating a subject with a disease or disorder comprising: administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, wherein:
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and un
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f ,
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ,
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined
  • a method of treating a subject with a disease or disorder associated with a serotonin 5-HT 2 receptor comprising: administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, wherein:
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and un
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f ;
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and Rr,
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f ; or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and
  • R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form the heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • the central nervous system (CNS) disorder is at least one selected from the group consisting of major depressive disorder (MDD), treatment- resistant depression (TRD), post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), bipolar and related disorders, obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder, a substance use disorder, an eating disorder, Alzheimer’s disease, cluster headache and migraine, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), pain and neuropathic pain, aphantasia, childhood-onset fluency disorder, major neurocognitive disorder, mild neurocognitive disorder, suicidal ideation, suicidal behavior, major depressive disorder with suicidal ideation or suicidal behavior, melancholic depression, atypical depression, dysthymia, non-suicidal self-injury disorder (NSSID), chronic fatigue syndrome, Lyme’s disease, gambling disorder, a paraphilic disorder, sexual dysfunction, peripheral neuropathy, and obesity.
  • MDD major depressive disorder
  • TRD treatment- resistant depression
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and un
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f ;
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ,
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined
  • Fig. 1 shows examples of general synthetic routes which can be used to access the compounds of the present disclosure
  • LG leaving group, e.g., chloride, bromide, tosylate, etc;
  • Fig. 2 shows a synthetic route to compound I-3
  • Fig. 3 shows a synthetic route to compound II-2
  • Fig. 4 shows a synthetic route to compound II-3 ;
  • Fig. 5 shows a synthetic route to compound II-6
  • Fig. 6 shows a synthetic route to compound II-10
  • Fig. 7 shows a synthetic route to compound II-12
  • Fig. 8 shows a synthetic route to compound II-15
  • Fig. 9 shows a synthetic route to compound II-19
  • Fig. 10 shows a synthetic route to compound II-20
  • Fig. 11 shows a synthetic route to compound II-21 ;
  • Fig. 12 shows a synthetic route to compound III-2
  • Fig. 13 shows a synthetic route to compound III-3 ;
  • Fig. 14 shows a synthetic route to compound III-6
  • Fig. 15 shows a synthetic route to compound III- 10
  • Fig. 16 shows a synthetic route to compound III- 12
  • Fig. 17 shows a synthetic route to compound III-13
  • Fig. 18 shows a synthetic route to compound III- 14
  • Fig. 19 shows a synthetic route to compound IV-3
  • Fig. 20 shows a synthetic route to compound IV-21
  • Fig. 21 shows a synthetic route to compound IV-40
  • Fig. 25 is a graph showing the effects of compounds II-6 and III-6 (10 mg/kg PO) compared to positive control ( ⁇ )2,5-dimethoxy-4-iodoamphetamine (DOI, 10 mg/kg PO) on the serotonin 5-HT 2A receptor-dependent head-twitch response (HTR) in adult, male C57Bl/6J mice;
  • Fig. 26 is a graph showing 5-HT 2A receptor functional assay results, as percent maximal 5-HT change from baseline; compounds were tested in triplicate at 500 nM and 50 ⁇ M concentrations;
  • Fig. 27 is a graph showing the dose-response 5-HT 2A functional assay results as a percent of control agonist response for compound II-2; tested in duplicate at the indicated concentrations and the EC 50 values were determined by non-linear regression analysis of the concentration-response curves generated with mean replicate values using Hill equation curve fitting;
  • Fig. 28 is a graph showing the dose-response 5-HT 2A functional assay results as a percent of control agonist response for compounds III-2 and IV-21; tested in duplicate at the indicated concentrations and the EC 50 values were determined by non-linear regression analysis of the concentration-response curves generated with mean replicate values using Hill equation curve fitting; and
  • Fig. 29 is a graph showing the dose-response 5-HT 2B functional assay results as a percent of control agonist response for compounds III-2 and IV-21; tested in duplicate at the indicated concentrations and the EC 50 values were determined by non-linear regression analysis of the concentration-response curves generated with mean replicate values using Hill equation curve fitting.
  • Alkyl refers to monovalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and such as 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 1 to 5, or 1 to 4, or 1 to 3, or 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • This term includes, by way of example, linear and branched hydrocarbyl groups such as methyl (CH 3 -), ethyl (CH 3 CH 2 -), n-propyl (CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 -), isopropyl ((CH 3 ) 2 CH-), n-butyl (CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), isobutyl ((CH 3 )2CHCH 2 -), sec-butyl ((CH 3 )(CH 3 CH 2 )CH-), t-butyl (t- Bu)((CH 3 ) 3 C-), n-pentyl (CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), and neopentyl ((CH 3 ) 3 CCH 2 -).
  • linear and branched hydrocarbyl groups such as methyl (CH 3 -), ethyl (CH 3 CH 2 -), n-propyl (CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 -), isopropyl ((CH 3
  • substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group as defined herein wherein one or more carbon atoms in the alkyl chain have been optionally replaced with a heteroatom such as -O-, -N-, -S-, -S(O) n - (where n is 0 to 2), -NR- (where R is hydrogen or alkyl) and having from 1 to 10 substituents selected from the group consisting of deuterium, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, oxo, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thi
  • Alkylene refers to divalent aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups having from 1 to 6, including, for example, 1 to 3 carbon atoms that are either straight-chained or branched, and which are optionally interrupted with one or more groups selected from -O-, -NR 10 - , -NR 10 C(O)-, -C(O)NR 10 - and the like.
  • This term includes, by way of example, methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -), n-propylene (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), iso-propylene (-CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-), (-C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), (-C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 C(O)-), (-C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 C(O)NH-), (-CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -), and the like.
  • Substituted alkylene refers to an alkylene group having from 1 to 3 hydrogens replaced with substituents as described for carbons in the definition of “substituted” below.
  • alkane refers to alkyl group and alkylene group, as defined herein.
  • alkylaminoalkyl refers to the groups R NHR - where R is alkyl group as defined herein and R is alkylene, alkenylene or alkynylene group as defined herein.
  • alkaryl or “aralkyl” refers to the groups -alkylene-aryl and -substituted alkylene-aryl where alkylene, substituted alkylene and aryl are defined herein.
  • Alkoxy refers to the group -O-alkyl, wherein alkyl is as defined herein. Alkoxy includes, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, t-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, and the like.
  • alkoxy also refers to the groups alkenyl-O-, cycloalkyl-O-, cycloalkenyl-O-, and alkynyl-O-, where alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • substituted alkoxy refers to the groups substituted alkyl-O-, substituted alkenyl-O-, substituted cycloalkyl-O-, substituted cycloalkenyl-O-, and substituted alkynyl-O- where substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl and substituted alkynyl are as defined herein.
  • alkoxyamino refers to the group -NH-alkoxy, wherein alkoxy is defined herein.
  • haloalkoxy refers to the groups alkyl-O- wherein one or more hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group have been substituted with a halo group and include, by way of examples, groups such as trifluoromethoxy, and the like.
  • haloalkyl refers to a substituted alkyl group as described above, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group have been substituted with a halo group.
  • groups include, without limitation, fluoroalkyl groups, such as trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoroethyl and the like.
  • alkylalkoxy refers to the groups -alkylene-O-alkyl, alkylene-O-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-O-alkyl, and substituted alkylene-O-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein.
  • alkylthioalkoxy refers to the group -alkylene-S-alkyl, alkylene-S- substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-S-alkyl and substituted alkylene-S-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein.
  • Alkenyl refers to straight chain or branched hydrocarbyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, for example 2 to 4 carbon atoms and having at least 1, for example from 1 to 2 sites of double bond unsaturation. This term includes, by way of example, bi-vinyl, allyl, and but-3-en-l-yl. Included within this term are the cis and trans isomers or mixtures of these isomers.
  • substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group as defined herein having from 1 to 5 substituents, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, oxo, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino,
  • Alkynyl refers to straight or branched monovalent hydrocarbyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, for example, 2 to 3 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and for example, from 1 to 2 sites of triple bond unsaturation. Examples of such alkynyl groups include acetylenyl (-C ⁇ CH), and propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH).
  • substituted alkynyl refers to an alkynyl group as defined herein having from 1 to 5 substituents, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from deuterium, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, oxo, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, al
  • Alkynyloxy refers to the group -O-alkynyl, wherein alkynyl is as defined herein. Alkynyloxy includes, by way of example, ethynyloxy, propynyloxy, and the like.
  • Acyl refers to the groups H-C(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl-C(O)-, alkenyl- C(O)-, substituted alkenyl-C(O)-, alkynyl-C(O)-, substituted alkynyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)- , substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl- C(O)-, substituted aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)-, substituted heteroaryl-C(O)-, heterocyclyl- C(O)-, and substituted heterocyclyl-C(O)-, wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl,
  • “Acylamino” refers to the groups -NR 20 C(O)alkyl, -NR 20 C(O)substituted alkyl, N R 20 C(O)cycloalkyl, -NR 20 C(O)substituted cycloalkyl,
  • Aminocarbonyl or the term “aminoacyl” refers to the group -C(O)NR 21 R 22 , wherein R 21 and R 22 independently are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic and where R 21 and R 22 are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic group, and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloal
  • Aminocarbonylamino refers to the group ANR 21 C(O)NR 22 R 23 where R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl, or where two R groups are joined to form a heterocyclyl group.
  • alkoxycarbonylamino refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl are as defined herein.
  • acyloxy refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)O-, substituted alkyl-C(O)O-, cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, aryl-C(O)O-, heteroaryl-C(O)O-, and heterocyclyl-C(O)O- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl are as defined herein.
  • Aminosulfonyl refers to the group -SO 2 NR 21 R 22 , wherein R 21 and R 22 independently are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where R 21 and R 22 are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic group and alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, substituted aryl
  • “Sulfonylamino” refers to the group -NR 21 SO 2 R 22 , wherein R 21 and R 22 independently are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic and where R 21 and R 22 are optionally joined together with the atoms bound thereto to form a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic group, and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl
  • Aryl or “Ar” refers to a monovalent aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 18 carbon atoms having a single ring (such as is present in a phenyl group) or a ring system having multiple condensed rings (examples of such aromatic ring systems include naphthyl, anthryl and indanyl) which condensed rings may or may not be aromatic, provided that the point of attachment is through an atom of an aromatic ring. This term includes, by way of example, phenyl and naphthyl.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from acyloxy, hydroxyl, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halogen, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy,
  • Aryloxy refers to the group -O-aryl, wherein aryl is as defined herein, including, by way of example, phenoxy, naphthoxy, and the like, including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined herein.
  • Amino refers to the group -NH 2 .
  • substituted amino refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclyl provided that at least one R is not hydrogen.
  • azido refers to the group -N 3 .
  • Carboxyl refers to -CO 2 H or salts thereof.
  • Carboxyl ester or “carboxy ester” or the terms “carboxyalkyl” or “carboxylalkyl” refers to the groups -C(O)O-alkyl, -C(O)O-substituted alkyl, -C(O)O-alkenyl, -C(O)O-substituted alkenyl, -C(O)O-alkynyl, -C(O)O-substituted alkynyl, -C(O)O-aryl, -C(O)O-substituted aryl, -C(0)0-cycloalkyl, -C(O)O-substituted cycloalkyl, -C(O)O-cycloalkenyl, -C(O)O-substituted cycloalkenyl, -C(O)O-heteroaryl, -C(O)O-substit
  • (Carboxyl ester)oxy” or “carbonate” refers to the groups -O-C(O)O- alkyl, -O-C(O)O-substituted alkyl, -O-C(O)O-alkenyl, -O-C(O)O-substituted alkenyl, -O- C(O)O-alkynyl, -O-C(O)O-substituted alkynyl, -O-C(O)O-aryl, -O-C(O)O-substituted aryl, - O-C(O)O-cycloalkyl, -O-C(O)O-substituted cycloalkyl, -O-C(O)O-cycloalkenyl, -O-C(O)O- substituted cycloalkenyl, -O-C(O)O-heteroaryl, -O-C(
  • Cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 10 carbon atoms having single or multiple cyclic rings including fused, bridged, and spiro ring systems.
  • suitable cycloalkyl groups include, for instance, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclooctyl and the like.
  • Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
  • substituted cycloalkyl refers to cycloalkyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from deuterium, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, oxo, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy,
  • Cycloalkenyl refers to non-aromatic cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 10 carbon atoms having single or multiple rings and having at least one double bond and for example, from 1 to 2 double bonds.
  • substituted cycloalkenyl refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from deuterium, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamin
  • Cycloalkynyl refers to non-aromatic cycloalkyl groups of from 5 to 10 carbon atoms having single or multiple rings and having at least one triple bond.
  • Cycloalkoxy refers to -O-cycloalkyl
  • Cycloalkenyloxy refers to -O-cycloalkenyl.
  • Halo or “halogen” refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo.
  • “Hydroxy” or “hydroxyl” refers to the group -OH.
  • Heteroaryl refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms, such as from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 to 10 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfor within the ring.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (such as, pyridinyl, imidazolyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings in a ring system (for example as in groups such as, indolizinyl, quinolinyl, benzofuran, benzimidazolyl or benzothienyl), wherein at least one ring within the ring system is aromatic and at least one ring within the ring system is aromatic , provided that the point of attachment is through an atom of an aromatic ring.
  • the nitrogen and/or sulfur ring atom(s) of the heteroaryl group are optionally oxidized to provide for the N-oxide (N ⁇ O), sulfinyl, or sulfonyl moieties.
  • N ⁇ O N-oxide
  • sulfinyl N-oxide
  • sulfonyl moieties N-oxide (N ⁇ O), sulfinyl, or sulfonyl moieties.
  • This term includes, by way of example, pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, thiophenyl, and furanyl.
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from acyloxy, hydroxyl, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halogen, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thi
  • heteroarylkyl refers to the groups -alkylene-heteroaryl where alkylene and heteroaryl are defined herein. This term includes, by way of example, pyridylmethyl, pyridylethyl, indolylmethyl, and the like.
  • Heteroaryloxy refers to -O-heteroaryl.
  • Heterocycle,” “heterocyclic,” “heterocycloalkyl,” and “heterocyclyl” refer to a saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused bridged and spiro ring systems, and having from 3 to 20 ring atoms, including 1 to 10 hetero- ring atoms. These ring atoms are selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen, wherein, in fused ring systems, one or more of the rings can be cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, provided that the point of attachment is through the non-aromatic ring.
  • the nitrogen and/or sulfur atom(s) of the heterocyclic group are optionally oxidized to provide for the N-oxide, -S(O)-, or -SO 2 - moieties.
  • heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, aziridine, azetidine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline,
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5, or from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from deuterium, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, oxo, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino,
  • Heterocyclyloxy refers to the group -O-heterocyclyl.
  • heterocyclylthio refers to the group heterocyclic-S-.
  • heterocyclene refers to the diradical group formed from a heterocycle, as defined herein.
  • hydroxyamino refers to the group -NHOH.
  • Niro refers to the group -NO 2 .
  • “Sulfonyl” refers to the group SO 2 -alkyl, S O 2 -substituted alkyl, SO 2 -alkenyl, SO 2 - substituted alkenyl, SO 2 -cycloalkyl, SO 2 -substituted cylcoalkyl, SO 2 -cycloalkenyl, SO 2 - substituted cylcoalkenyl, SO 2 -aryl, SO 2 -substituted aryl, SO 2 -heteroaryl, SO 2 -substituted heteroaryl, SO 2 -heterocyclic, and SO 2 -substituted heterocyclic, wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, substitute
  • “Sulfonyloxy” refers to the group -OSO 2 -alkyl, OSO 2 -substituted alkyl, OSO 2 - alkenyl, OSO 2 -substituted alkenyl, OSO 2 -cycloalkyl, OSO 2 -substituted cylcoalkyl, OSO 2 - cycloalkenyl, OSO 2 -substituted cylcoalkenyl, OSO 2 -aryl, OSO 2 -substituted aryl, OSO 2 - heteroaryl, OSO 2 -substituted heteroaryl, OSO 2 -heterocyclic, and OSO 2 substituted heterocyclic, wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl
  • aminocarbonyloxy refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • Alkylthio or the term “thioalkoxy” refers to the group -S-alkyl, wherein alkyl is as defined herein.
  • sulfur may be oxidized to -S(O)-.
  • the sulfoxide may exist as one or more stereoisomers.
  • substituted thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
  • thioaryloxy refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined herein including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined herein.
  • heteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined herein including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined herein.
  • heterocyclooxy refers to the group heterocyclyl- S- wherein the heterocyclyl group is as defined herein including optionally substituted heterocyclyl groups as also defined herein.
  • substituted when used to modify a specified group or radical, can also mean that one or more hydrogen atoms of the specified group or radical are each, independently of one another, replaced with the same or different substituent groups as defined below.
  • R 60 is selected from the group consisting of optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl, each R 70 is independently hydrogen or R 60 ; each R 80 is independently R 70 or alternatively, two R 80’ s, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded, form a 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocycloalkyl which may optionally include from 1 to 4 of the same or different additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of O, N and S, of which N may have -H or C 1 -C 3 alkyl substitution; and
  • Each M + may independently be, for example, an alkali ion, such as K + , Na + , Li + ; an ammonium ion, such as + N(R 60 ) 4 ; or an alkaline earth ion, such as [Ca 2+ ] 0.5 , [Mg 2+ ] 0.5 , or [Ba 2+ ] 0.5 (“subscript 0.5 means that one of the counter ions for such divalent alkali earth ions can be an ionized form of a compound of the disclosure and the other a typical counter ion such as chloride, or two ionized compounds disclosed herein can serve as counter ions for such divalent alkali earth ions, or a doubly ionized compound of the disclosure can serve as the counter ion for such divalent alkali earth ions).
  • an alkali ion such as K + , Na + , Li +
  • an ammonium ion such as + N(R 60 ) 4
  • -NR 80 R 80 is meant to include -NH 2 , -NH-alkyl, N -pyrrolidinyl, A-piperazinyl, 4N -methyl-piperazin-l-yl and N-morpholinyl.
  • substituent groups for hydrogens on unsaturated carbon atoms in “substituted” alkene, alkyne, aryl and heteroaryl groups are, unless otherwise specified, deuterium, -R 60 , halo, -O-M + , -OR 70 , -SR 70 , -S-M + , -NR 80 R 80 , trihalomethyl, -CF 3 , -CN, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -NO 2 , -N 3 , -SO 2 R 70 , -SO 3 - M + , -SO 3 R 70 , -OSO 2 R 70 , -OSO 3 -M + , -OSO 3 R 70 , -PO 3 -2 (M + ) 2 , -P(O)(OR 70 )O- M + , -P(O)(OR 70 ) 2 , -C(O)R 70 ,
  • R 60 , R 70 , R 80 and M + are as previously defined, provided that in case of substituted alkene or alkyne, the substituents are not -O-M + , -OR 70 , -SR 70 , or -S- M + .
  • substituent groups for hydrogens on nitrogen atoms in “substituted” heteroalkyl and cycloheteroalkyl groups are, unless otherwise specified, -R 60 , -O-M + , -OR 70 , -SR 70 , -S-M + , -NR 80 R 80 , trihalomethyl, -CF 3 , -CN, -NO, -NO 2 , -S(O) 2 R 70 , -8(0) 2 O-M + , -S(O) 2 OR 70 , -OS(O) 2 R 70 , -OS( O) 2 O M + , -OS(O) 2 OR 70 , -P(O)(O-) 2 (M + ) 2 , -P(O)(OR 70 )O-M + , -P(O)(OR 70 )(OR 70 ), -C(O)R 70 , - C(
  • a group that is substituted has 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents, 1, 2, or 3 substituents, 1 or 2 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • arylalkyloxycarbonyl refers to the group (aryl)-(alkyl)-O-C(O)-.
  • any of the groups disclosed herein which contain one or more substituents it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non-feasible.
  • the subject compounds include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds.
  • a substituent or group “comprise(s) a/the fluoroalkyl group” (which is sometimes denoted as R f herein) it is to be understood that the substituent or group may itself be the fluoroalkyl group, or the substituent or group may contain a fluoroalkyl group within in its chemical structure, provided that the presence of the fluoroalkyl group is consistent with the other requirements set forth of the substituent or group being discussed.
  • substituent “-R” when substituent “-R” is defined to comprise a fluoroalkyl group, it is to be understood that - R may be itself a fluoroalkyl group (e.g., -CF 3 ), or a group containing the fluoroalkyl group (e.g., -SCF 3 ) that is consistent with the other requirements set forth of -R.
  • fatty describes a compound with a long-chain (linear) hydrophobic portion made up of hydrogen and anywhere from 4 to 26 carbon atoms, which may be fully saturated or partially unsaturated.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable “physiologically acceptable,” and the like, are employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • the phrases “pharmaceutically acceptable salt,” “physiologically acceptable salt,” and the like means a salt which is acceptable for administration to a patient, such as a mammal (salts with counterions having acceptable mammalian safety for a given dosage regime).
  • such salts can be derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases, by way of example, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, and tetraalkylammonium salts, and the like, and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, addition salts with inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, sulfate, sulfamate, phosphate, nitrate, perchlorate salts, and the like, and addition salts with organic acids, such as formate, tartrate, besylate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, malonate, oxalate, fumarate, benzoate, salicylate, succinate, oxalate, glycolate, hemi-oxalate, hemi-fumarate, propionate, stearate, lactate, citrate, ascorbate, pamoate, hydroxymaleate, phenylacetate, glutamate, 2- acet
  • salt thereof means a compound formed when a proton of an acid is replaced by a cation, such as a metal cation or an organic cation and the like.
  • the salt is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, although this is not required for salts of intermediate compounds that are not intended for administration to a patient.
  • salts of the present compounds include those wherein the compound is protonated by an inorganic or organic acid to form a cation, with the conjugate base of the inorganic or organic acid as the anionic component of the salt.
  • Solvate refers to a physical association of a compound or salt of the present disclosure with one or more solvent molecules, whether organic, inorganic, or a mixture of both. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. In certain instances, the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid.
  • the solvent molecules in the solvate may be present in a regular arrangement and/or a non-ordered arrangement.
  • the solvate may comprise either a stoichiometric or nonstoichiometric amount of the solvent molecules. “Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates.
  • solvents include, but are not limited to, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylsulfoxide, and water.
  • the solvent is water
  • the solvate formed is a hydrate (e.g., monohydrate, dihydrate, etc.).
  • Exemplary solvates thus include, but are not limited to, hydrates, methanolates, ethanolates, isopropanolates, etc. Methods of solvation are generally known in the art.
  • Stereoisomers refer to compounds that have same atomic connectivity but different atomic arrangement in space. Stereoisomers include cis-trans isomers, E and Z isomers, enantiomers, and diastereomers.
  • compounds containing an acid and a base group within the same molecule depicted in neutral form may exist also in a zwitterionic form, as is the case for amino acid/ ammonium carboxylate tautomers.
  • compounds of the present disclosure e.g., compounds of Formula (I), Formula (V), etc., which are depicted to contain both amino and dihydrogen phosphate (- OPO3H 2 ) functionality in neutral form may also exist in zwitterionic form as the ammonium monohydrogen phosphate zwitterion.
  • a given chemical formula or name shall encompass all tautomeric forms thereof, insofar as they exist.
  • Prodrug is meant to indicate a compound that may be converted under physiological conditions or by solvolysis to a biologically active compound described herein.
  • prodrug refers to a precursor of a biologically active compound that is pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • a prodrug may be inactive when administered to a subject, e.g., an ester, a phosphate ester, etc. but is converted in vivo to an active compound, for example, by hydrolysis to a free carboxylic acid or free hydroxyl group.
  • the prodrug compound often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility or delayed release in a mammalian organism (see, e.g., Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrags (1985), pp.
  • prodrugs are also meant to include any covalently bonded carriers, which release the active compound in vivo when such prodrug is administered to a mammalian subject.
  • Prodrugs of an active compound may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the active compound in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either in routine manipulation or in vivo, to the parent active compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein a hydroxy, amino or mercapto group is bonded to any group that, when the prodrug of the active compound is administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxyl, free amino or free mercapto group, respectively.
  • prodrags include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, benzoate, and dihydrogen phosphate derivatives of an alcohol, or acetamide, formamide and benzamide derivatives of an amine functional group in the active compound and the like.
  • a “crystalline” solid is a type of solid whose fundamental three-dimensional structure consists of a highly regular pattern of atoms or molecules — with long range order — forming a crystal lattice, and thus displays sharp characteristic crystalline peak(s) in its X-ray power diffraction (XRPD) pattern.
  • crystalline solids can exist in different crystalline forms known as “polymorphs,” which have the same chemical composition, but differ in packing, geometric arrangement, and other descriptive properties of the crystalline solid state. As such, polymorphs may have different solid-state physical properties to affect, for example, the solubility, dissolution rate, bioavailability, chemical and physical stability, flowability, and compressibility, etc.
  • amorphous refers to a solid material having substantially no long range order in the position of its molecules — the molecules are arranged in a random manner so that there is effectively no well-defined arrangement, e.g., molecular packing, and no long range order.
  • Amorphous solids are generally isotropic, i.e., exhibit similar properties in all directions and do not have definite melting points.
  • an amorphous material is a solid material having substantially no sharp characteristic crystalline peak(s) in its X-ray power diffraction (XRPD) pattern (i.e., is not crystalline as determined by XRPD). Instead, one or several broad peaks (e.g., halos) appear in its XRPD pattern. Broad peaks are characteristic of an amorphous solid.
  • an “amorphous” subject compound/material is one characterized as having substantially no crystallinity — less than 10% crystallinity, less than 8% crystallinity, less than 6% crystallinity, less than 4% crystallinity, less than 2% crystallinity, less than 1% crystallinity, or 0% crystallinity — i.e., is at least 90%, at least 92%, at least 94%, at least 96%, at least 98%, or 100% amorphous, as determined for example by XRPD.
  • the % crystallinity can in some embodiments be determined by measuring the intensity of one or more peaks in the XRPD diffractogram compared to a reference peak, which may be that of an internal standard.
  • characterization techniques such as modulated differential scanning calorimetry (mDSC) analysis, Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR), and other quantitative methods, may also be employed to determine the percent a subject compound/material is amorphous or crystalline, including quantitative methods which provide the above percentages in terms of weight percent.
  • mDSC modulated differential scanning calorimetry
  • FTIR Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy
  • the compounds herein can exist in different salt, solvate, stereoisomer, tautomer, crystalline/amorphous (or polymorphic) forms, and the present disclosure is intended to include all permutations thereof, such as a solvate of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of a stereoisomer of the subject compound.
  • stable includes chemical stability and solid state (physical) stability.
  • chemical stability means that the compound can be stored in an isolated form, or in the form of a formulation in which it is provided in admixture with for example, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents or adjuvants as described herein, under normal storage conditions, with little or no chemical degradation or decomposition.
  • Solid-state stability means the compound can be stored in an isolated solid form, or the form of a solid formulation in which it is provided in admixture with, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, diluents or adjuvants as described herein, under normal storage conditions, with little or no solid-state transformation (e.g., hydration, dehydration, solvatization, desolvatization, crystallization, recrystallization or solid-state phase transition).
  • solid-state transformation e.g., hydration, dehydration, solvatization, desolvatization, crystallization, recrystallization or solid-state phase transition.
  • composition is equivalent to the term “formulation.”
  • a “vapor” is a solid substance in the gas phase at a temperature lower than its critical temperature, meaning that the vapor can be condensed to a liquid by increasing the pressure on it without reducing the temperature.
  • an “aerosol”, as used herein, is a suspension of fine solid particles or liquid droplets in a gas phase (e.g., air, oxygen, helium, nitrous oxide, and other gases, as well as mixtures thereof).
  • a “mist”, as used herein, is a subset of aerosols, differing from a vapor, and is a dispersion of liquid droplets (liquid phase) suspended in the gas phase (e.g., air, oxygen, helium, and mixtures thereof).
  • the liquid droplets of an aerosol or mist can comprise a drug moiety dissolved in an aqueous liquid, organic solvent, or a mixture thereof.
  • the term “inhalation session” describes a dosing event whereby the subject inhales a given dose of drug, irrespective of the number of breadths needed to inhale the given dose. For example, a subject prescribed to take 10 mg of a drug twice a day would undertake two inhalation sessions, each inhalation session providing 10 mg of the drug. The length of time and the number of breaths for each inhalation session would be dependent on factors such as the inhalation device used, the amount of drug that is drawn per breath, the concentration of the drug in the dosage form, the subject’s breathing pattern, etc.
  • treating means the treating or treatment of a disease or medical condition in a patient, such as a mammal (particularly a human) that includes: ameliorating the disease or medical condition, such as, eliminating or causing regression of the disease or medical condition in a patient; suppressing the disease or medical condition, for example by, slowing or arresting the development of the disease or medical condition in a patient; or alleviating one or more symptoms of the disease or medical condition in a patient.
  • prophylactic treatment can result in preventing the disease or medical condition from occurring, in a subject.
  • a “patient” or “subject,” used interchangeably herein, can be any mammal including, for example, a human or a non-human subject.
  • a patient or subject can have a condition to be treated or can be susceptible to a condition to be treated.
  • the terms “prevent,” “preventing” and “prevention” refer to the prevention of the onset, recurrence or spread of a disease, disorder, or condition, or of one or more symptoms thereof. The terms encompass the inhibition or reduction of a symptom of the particular disease, disorder, or condition.
  • Subjects with familial history of a disease, disorder, or condition, in particular, are candidates for preventive regimens in certain embodiments.
  • subjects who have a history of recurring symptoms are also potential candidates for the prevention.
  • the term “prevention” may be interchangeably used with the term “prophylactic treatment.”
  • “Therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount of a compound(s) sufficient to treat a specified disorder or disease or one or more of its symptoms and/or to prevent the occurrence of the disease or disorder (prophylactically effective amount).
  • a “prophylactically effective amount” of an active agent is an amount sufficient to prevent a disease, disorder, or condition, or prevent its recurrence.
  • the term “prophylactically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of another prophylactic agent.
  • administration schedule is a plan in which the type, amount, period, procedure, etc. of the drug in the drug treatment are shown in time series, and the dosage, administration method, administration order, administration date, and the like of each drug are indicated.
  • the date specified to be administered is determined before the start of the drug administration.
  • the administration is continued by repeating the course with the set of administration schedules as “courses”.
  • a “continuous” administration schedule means administration every day without interruption during the treatment course. If the administration schedule follows an “intermittent” administration schedule, then days of administration may be followed by “rest days” or days of non-administration of drug within the course.
  • a “drug holiday” indicates that the drug is not administered in a predetermined administration schedule. For example, after undergoing several courses of treatment, a subject may be prescribed a regulated drug holiday as part of the administration schedule, e.g., prior to re-recommencing active treatment.
  • toxic spikes is used herein to describe neurological spikes in concentration of any compound described herein that would produce side-effects of sedation or psychotomimetic effects, e.g., hallucination, dizziness, and nausea; which can not only have immediate repercussions, but also effect treatment compliance.
  • side effects may become more pronounced at blood concentration levels of about 250, 300, 400, 500 ng/L or more.
  • neuropsychiatric disease or disorder is a behavioral or psychological problem associated with a known neurological condition, and typically defined as a cluster of symptoms that co-exist.
  • Examples of neuropsychiatric disorders include, but are not limited to, attention deficit disorder, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, bipolar and manic disorders, depression, or any combinations thereof.
  • the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items.
  • the meaning of “a”, “an”, and “the” includes plural reference as well as the singular reference unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • the term “about” in association with a numerical value means that the value varies up or down by 5%. For example, for a value of about 100, means 95 to 105 (or any value between 95 and 105).
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and un
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, hydroxyl, unsubstituted alkyl, alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, unsubstituted alkylthio, alkylthio substituted with one or more deuterium, -OR f , and -SR f ,
  • R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ,
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f ; or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom atached thereto
  • X 1 and X 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are the same. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are different. In some embodiments, X 1 is hydrogen or deuterium, and X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • X 2 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, and n-propyl, preferably methyl.
  • X 2 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF 2 H, - CF 3 , etc.
  • one of X 1 and X 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 - C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are the same. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are different. In some embodiments, one of Y 1 and Y 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • R 2 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 2 is deuterium. In some embodiments, R 2 is a halogen, e.g., fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo. In some embodiments, R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • R 2 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl.
  • R 2 is a substituted alkyl (e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • R 2 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF 2 H, -CF 3 , etc.
  • R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl. In some embodiments, R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl. In some embodiments, R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 2 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • Ri is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, R 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 4 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 4 is deuterium. In some embodiments, R 4 is hydroxyl. In some embodiments, R 4 is an unsubstituted alkoxy group, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n- butoxy, isobutoxy, sec-butoxy, t-butoxy, n-pentoxy, neopentoxy, and hexoxy. In some embodiments, Riis a substituted alkoxy.
  • substituents may include, but are not limited to, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the alkoxy group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkoxy group may be -OCDH 2 , -OCD 2 H, -OCD 3 , -OCFH 2 , -OCF 2 H, -OCF 3 , etc.
  • R 4 is -OPO 3 H 2 .
  • R 5 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 5 is deuterium. In some embodiments, R 5 is hydroxyl. In some embodiments, R 5 is an unsubstituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl), examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl. In some embodiments, R 5 is methyl.
  • R 5 is methyl.
  • R 5 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be - CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • the alkyl group is a C 1 alkyl group (i.e., methyl group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be - CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 5 is an unsubstituted alkoxy group, such as an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy group, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, isobutoxy, sec-butoxy, t-butoxy, n-pentoxy, neopentoxy, and hexoxy.
  • R5 is an alkoxy group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkoxy group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • R5 is an unsubstituted alkylthio group, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, isobutylthio, sec-butylthio, t-butylthio, n-pentylthio, neopentylthio, and hexylthio.
  • R5 is an alkylthio group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkylthio group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the alkylthio group is a C 1 alkylthio group (i.e., a methylthio group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alktlthio group may be -SCDH 2 , -SCD 2 H, and -SCD 3 .
  • R 5 is -OR f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -OCH 2 F, -OCHF 2 , -OCF 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 F, -OCH 2 CHF 2 , -OCH 2 CF 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -OCH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -OCH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -OCH 2 F, -OCHF 2 , and -OCF 3 .
  • R5 is -SR f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -SCH 2 F, -SCHF 2 , -SCF 3 , -SCH 2 CH 2 F, -SCH 2 CHF 2 , -SCH 2 CF 3 , -SCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -SCH 2 C H 2 CHF 2 , -SCH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -SCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -SCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -SCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -SCH 2 F, -SCHF 2 , -SCF 3 .
  • R 6 and R 7 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, R 6 and R 7 are the same. In some embodiments, R 6 and R 7 are different. In some embodiments, R 6 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 6 is deuterium. In some embodiments, R 6 is a halogen, e.g., fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo. In some embodiments, R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • R 6 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl.
  • R 6 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • R 6 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF 2 H, -CF 3 , etc.
  • R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl. In some embodiments, R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl. In some embodiments, R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl. In some embodiments,
  • R 6 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • R 6 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, R 6 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 7 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 7 is deuterium. In some embodiments, R 7 is a halogen, e.g., fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo. In some embodiments, R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • R 7 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl. In some embodiments, R 7 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • R 7 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF2H, -CF 3 , etc.
  • R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl. In some embodiments, R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl. In some embodiments, R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 7 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • R 7 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl.
  • R 7 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 8 and R 9 may be the same, or different.
  • R 8 and R 9 are the same. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are different. In some embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 8 is unsubstituted alkyl. In some embodiments, R 8 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 8 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 8 is R f .
  • R f include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 9 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the alkyl group is a C 1 alkyl group (i.e., methyl group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 9 is R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O)R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , -S(O)CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O )CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , and -S(O)CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O) 2 R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)2CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S( O)2CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O
  • R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 3 -membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 4-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 5-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 7-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be an 8-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group contains a minimum of one nitrogen ring atom (the nitrogen atom intervening R 8 and R 9 ), and may optionally contain additional hetero-ring atoms (e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) for a total of 1 , 2, 3, or 4 hetero-ring atoms (at least one of which is a nitrogen ring atom).
  • additional hetero-ring atoms e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen
  • heterocycloalkyl group examples include, but are not limited to, aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, carbazole, carboline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, thiazolidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, with particular mention being made to aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, and piperidine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be substituted with one fluorine atom, two fluorine atoms, three fluorine atoms, four fluorine atoms, or more. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group is substituted with two fluorine atoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups substituted with at least one fluorine atom formed from joining R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto include, but are not limited to,
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g,, those exemplified above. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a hetero cycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above, when
  • X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , R 2 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 are hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a 4,4-difluoropiperidinyl group (represented below) when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , R 2 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 are hydrogen.
  • R f represents a fluoroalkyl group, and at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f .
  • Each R f present in the disclosed compounds is independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium.
  • each H x is hydrogen.
  • each H x is deuterium.
  • at least one H x is deuterium and at least one HP is hydrogen.
  • n is 0. In some embodiments, n is 1. In some embodiments, n is 2. In some embodiments, n is 3.
  • R f examples include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 F, -CHF 2 , -CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 ,
  • the compound comprises one R f group. In some embodiments,
  • R 5 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and R 8
  • R 9 represent a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 8 , and R 9 are each -CH 3 or CD 3 , or where R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and R5 and R 8 represent a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 5 is H, -OCH 3 , -OCD 3 , -SCH 3 , -SCD 3 , and R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • two of R5, R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , which may be the same or different.
  • R 8 and R 9 comprise a fluoroalkyl group, R f , which can be the same or different, and R 5 represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 5 is H, -OCH 3 , -OCD 3 , -SCH 3 , or -SCD 3 .
  • R 5 and R 9 comprise a fluoroalkyl group, R f , which can be the same or different, and R 8 represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • each of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , which may all be the same, all be different, or where two R f groups are the same and the third R f group is different.
  • R 9 is not -CH 2 CF 3 when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , R 2 , R 4 , R 5 , Re, and R 7 are hydrogen and R 8 is hydrogen or methyl. In some embodiments, R 9 is -CH 2 CF 3 when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , Y 2 , R 2 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , and R 7 are hydrogen and R 8 is hydrogen or methyl.
  • the compound e.g., the compound of Formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (II),
  • the compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (II), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof,
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f ; or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form the heterocycloalky
  • X 1 and X 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are the same. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are different. In some embodiments, X 1 is hydrogen or deuterium, and X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • X 2 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, and n-propyl, preferably methyl.
  • X 2 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF2H, - CF 3 , etc.
  • one of X 1 and X 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 - C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are the same. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are different. In some embodiments, one of Y 1 and Y 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen. R 8 and R 9 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are the same. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are different. In some embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 8 is unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 8 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 8 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 8 is R f .
  • R f include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 9 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the alkyl group is a C 1 alkyl group (i.e., methyl group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 9 is R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O)R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , -S(O)CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O )CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , and -S(O)CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O) 2 R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S( O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O
  • R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 3-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 4-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 5-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 7-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be an 8-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group contains a minimum of one nitrogen ring atom (the nitrogen atom intervening R 8 and R 9 ), and may optionally contain additional hetero-ring atoms (e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) for a total of 1 , 2, 3, or 4 hetero-ring atoms (at least one of which is a nitrogen ring atom).
  • additional hetero-ring atoms e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen
  • heterocycloalkyl group examples include, but are not limited to, aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, carbazole, carboline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, thiazolidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, with particular mention being made to aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, and piperidine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be substituted with one fluorine atom, two fluorine atoms, three fluorine atoms, four fluorine atoms, or more. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group is substituted with two fluorine atoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups substituted with at least one fluorine atom formed from joining R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto include, but are not limited to,
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above, when
  • X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a 4,4-difluoropiperidinyl group (represented below) when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R f represents a fluoroalkyl group.
  • at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f .
  • Each R f present in the disclosed compounds is independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium.
  • each H x is hydrogen.
  • each H x is deuterium.
  • at least one H x is deuterium and at least one H x is hydrogen.
  • n is 0.
  • n is 1.
  • n is 2.
  • n is 3.
  • R f examples include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 F, -CHF 2 , -CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 ,
  • the compound comprises one R f group. In some embodiments,
  • R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f
  • R 8 represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • both R 8 and R 9 comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , which may be the same or different.
  • R 9 is not -CH 2 CF 3 when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Yz are hydrogen and R 8 is hydrogen or methyl.
  • the compound e.g., the compound of Formula (II), is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the compound is not
  • the compound is not
  • the compound is not
  • the compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (III), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, wherein:
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ; R?
  • R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form the heterocycloalkyl substituted
  • X 1 and X 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are the same. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are different. In some embodiments, X 1 is hydrogen or deuterium, and X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • X 2 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, and n-propyl, preferably methyl.
  • X 2 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF2H, - CF 3 , etc.
  • one of X 1 and X 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 - C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are the same. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are different. In some embodiments, one of Y 1 and Y 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are the same. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are different. In some embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 8 is unsubstituted alkyl. In some embodiments, R 8 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 8 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 8 is R f .
  • R f include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 9 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the alkyl group is a C 1 alkyl group (i.e., methyl group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 9 is R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O)R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , -S(O)CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O )CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , and -S(O)CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O) 2 R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S( O)2CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O)2CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CF 3 .
  • R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 3-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 4-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 5-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 7-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be an 8-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group contains a minimum of one nitrogen ring atom (the nitrogen atom intervening R 8 and R 9 ), and may optionally contain additional hetero-ring atoms (e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) for a total of 1 , 2, 3 , or 4 hetero-ring atoms (at least one of which is a nitrogen ring atom).
  • additional hetero-ring atoms e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen
  • heterocycloalkyl group examples include, but are not limited to, aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, carbazole, carboline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, thiazolidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, with particular mention being made to aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, and piperidine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be substituted with one fluorine atom, two fluorine atoms, three fluorine atoms, four fluorine atoms, or more. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group is substituted with two fluorine atoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups substituted with at least one fluorine atom formed from joining R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto include, but are not limited to,
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above, when
  • X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a 4,4-difluoropiperidinyl group (represented below) when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R f represents a fluoroalkyl group. In the compound of Formula (III), at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f .
  • Each R f present in the disclosed compounds is independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium.
  • each H x is hydrogen.
  • each H x is deuterium.
  • at least one H x is deuterium and at least one H x is hydrogen.
  • n is 0.
  • n is 1.
  • n is 2.
  • n is 3.
  • R f examples include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 F, -CHF 2 , -CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 ,
  • the compound comprises one R f group. In some embodiments,
  • R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f
  • R 8 represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • both R 8 and R 9 comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , which may be the same or different.
  • the compound e.g., the compound of Formula (III) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (IV), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, wherein:
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium;
  • R 5 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkoxy, alkoxy substituted with one or more deuterium, and -OR f ;
  • R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ,
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f , or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and/or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined
  • X 1 and X 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are the same. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are different. In some embodiments, X 1 is hydrogen or deuterium, and X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • X 2 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, and n-propyl, preferably methyl.
  • X 2 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF 2 H, - CF 3 , etc.
  • one of X 1 and X 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 - C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are the same. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are different. In some embodiments, one of Y 1 and Y 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • R5 is an unsubstituted alkoxy group, such as an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy group, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, n- propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, isobutoxy, sec-butoxy, t-butoxy, n-pentoxy, neopentoxy, and hexoxy.
  • R 5 is an alkoxy group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkoxy group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkoxy group may be -OCDH 2 , -OCD 2 H, and -OCD 3 .
  • R5 is -OR f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -OCH 2 F, -OCHF 2 , -OCF 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 F, -OCH 2 CHF 2 , -OCH 2 CF 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -OC H 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -OCH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -OCH 2 F, -OCHF 2 , and -OCF 3 .
  • R 8 and R 9 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are the same. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are different. In some embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 8 is unsubstituted alkyl. In some embodiments, R 8 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 8 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 8 is R f .
  • R f include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 9 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the alkyl group is a C 1 alkyl group (i.e., methyl group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 9 is R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O)R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , -S(O)CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O )CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , and -S(O)CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O) 2 R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S( O)2CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O
  • R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 3 -membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 4-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 5 -membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 7-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be an 8-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group contains a minimum of one nitrogen ring atom (the nitrogen atom intervening R 8 and R 9 ), and may optionally contain additional hetero-ring atoms (e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) for a total of 1 , 2, 3 , or 4 hetero-ring atoms (at least one of which is a nitrogen ring atom).
  • additional hetero-ring atoms e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen
  • heterocycloalkyl group examples include, but are not limited to, aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, carbazole, carboline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, thiazolidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, with particular mention being made to aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, and piperidine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be substituted with one fluorine atom, two fluorine atoms, three fluorine atoms, four fluorine atoms, or more. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group is substituted with two fluorine atoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups substituted with at least one fluorine atom formed from joining R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto include, but are not limited to,
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocyclo alkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above, when
  • X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a 4,4-difluoropiperidinyl group (represented below) when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R f represents a fluoroalkyl group.
  • at least one of R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f .
  • Each R f present in the disclosed compounds is independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium.
  • each H x is hydrogen.
  • each H x is deuterium.
  • at least one H x is deuterium and at least one H x is hydrogen.
  • n is 0.
  • n is 1.
  • n is 2.
  • n is 3.
  • R f examples include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 F, -CHF 2 , -CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 ,
  • the compound comprises one Rf group.
  • R 5 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , and R 8
  • R 9 represent a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, for example where R 8 , and R 9 are each -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, and R 5 and R 8 represent a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, for example where R5 is -OCH 3 or -OCD 3 and R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • R 5 , R 8 , and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, which may be the same or different.
  • R 8 and R 9 comprise a fluoroalkyl group, Rf, which can be the same or different, and R5 represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, for example where R 5 -OCH 3 or -OCD 3 .
  • Rs and R9 comprise a fluoroalkyl group, Rf, which can be the same or different, and Rg represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, for example where R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • each of R 5 , R 8, and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, Rf, which may all be the same, all be different, or where two Rf groups are the same and the third Rf group is different.
  • the compound e.g., the compound of Formula (IV) is selected from the group consisting of:
  • the compound of Formula (I) has a structure of Formula (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof,
  • X 1 and X 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, deuterium, unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl, unsubstituted or substituted cycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl, unsubstituted or substituted aryl, and unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl; Y 1 and Y 2 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and deuterium; R 8 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, and R f ;
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted alkyl, an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, R f , -S(O)R f , and -S(O) 2 R f ; or alternatively R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are optionally joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine; and R f is a fluoroalkyl group, with each R f being independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium; wherein at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f , or R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form the heterocycloalky
  • X 1 and X 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are the same. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, X 1 and X 2 are different. In some embodiments, X 1 is hydrogen or deuterium, and X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl (e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted a C 1 -C 6 alkyl).
  • X 2 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, and n-propyl, preferably methyl.
  • X 2 is a substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • the substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, -CD 3 , -CFH 2 , -CF2H, - CF 3 , etc.
  • one of X 1 and X 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl, e.g., an unsubstituted or substituted allyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl.
  • Xj and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, examples of which may include, but are not limited to, adamantyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is a substituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl.
  • Preferred substituents may include, but are not limited to, alkyl, deuterium, halogen (e.g., fluorine), polar substituents such as hydroxyl or polyether substituents, etc.
  • the cycloalkyl group may contain one, or more than one, substituent.
  • X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted aryl. In some embodiments, X 1 and/or X 2 is an unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl.
  • Y 1 and Y 2 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are the same. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are hydrogen. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are deuterium. In some embodiments, Y 1 and Y 2 are different. In some embodiments, one of Y 1 and Y 2 is deuterium while the other is hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 may be the same, or different. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are the same. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are different. In some embodiments, R 8 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 8 is unsubstituted alkyl. In some embodiments, R 8 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n- butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 8 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 8 is R f .
  • R f include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 9 is an unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, examples of which include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n- propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, with particular mention being made to methyl.
  • R 9 is an alkyl substituted with one or more deuterium, e.g., a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group substituted with one or more deuterium.
  • the alkyl group may contain one, or more than one, deuterium substituent.
  • the alkyl group is a C 1 alkyl group (i.e., methyl group)
  • the deuterium substituted C 1 alkyl group may be -CDH 2 , -CD 2 H, and -CD 3 , with particular mention being made to -CD 3 .
  • R 9 is R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O)R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , -S(O)CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O )CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O)CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O)CH 2 F, -S(O)CHF 2 , and -S(O)CF 3 .
  • R 9 is -S(O) 2 R f , examples of which include, but are not limited to, -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 F, -S( O)2CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O) 2 CH 2 F, -S(O) 2 CHF 2 , and -S(O) 2 CF 3 , with particular mention being made to -S(O
  • R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto are joined to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 3 -membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 4-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 5-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 6-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be a 7-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be an 8-membered ring.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group contains a minimum of one nitrogen ring atom (the nitrogen atom intervening R 8 and R 9 ), and may optionally contain additional hetero-ring atoms (e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) for a total of 1 , 2, 3, or 4 hetero-ring atoms (at least one of which is a nitrogen ring atom).
  • additional hetero-ring atoms e.g., nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen
  • heterocycloalkyl group examples include, but are not limited to, aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, carbazole, carboline, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1 ,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, thiazolidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, with particular mention being made to aziridine, azetidine, pyrrolidine, and piperidine.
  • the heterocycloalkyl group may be substituted with one fluorine atom, two fluorine atoms, three fluorine atoms, four fluorine atoms, or more. In some embodiments, the heterocycloalkyl group is substituted with two fluorine atoms.
  • heterocycloalkyl groups substituted with at least one fluorine atom formed from joining R 8 and R 9 together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto include, but are not limited to,
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom atached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above. In some embodiments, R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a heterocycloalkyl substituted with at least one fluorine, e.g., those exemplified above, when
  • X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R 8 and R 9 are not joined with the nitrogen atom attached thereto to form a 4,4-difluoropiperidinyl group (represented below) when X 1 , X 2 , Y 1 , and Y 2 are hydrogen.
  • R f represents a fluoroalkyl group.
  • at least one of R 8 and R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f .
  • Each R f present in the disclosed compounds is independently selected from the group consisting of -(CH x 2 ) n CH 2 F, -(CH x 2 ) n CHF 2 , and -(CH x 2 ) n CF 3 , wherein n is 0 to 3, and each H x is independently hydrogen or deuterium.
  • each H x is hydrogen.
  • each H x is deuterium.
  • at least one H x is deuterium and at least one H x is hydrogen.
  • n is 0.
  • n is 1.
  • n is 2.
  • n is 3.
  • R f examples include, but are not limited to, -CH 2 F, -CHF 2 , -CF 3 , -CH 2 CH 2 F, -CH 2 CHF 2 ,
  • the compound comprises one R f group. In some embodiments,
  • R 9 comprises the fluoroalkyl group, R f
  • R 8 represents a group that does not comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , for example where R 8 is -CH 3 or CD 3 .
  • both R 8 and R 9 comprise the fluoroalkyl group, R f , which may be the same or different.
  • the compound e.g., the compound of Formula (V)
  • the compound of Formula (V) is selected from the group consisting of: and or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) may contain a stereogenic center.
  • the compounds may exist as different stereoisomeric forms, even though Formula (I) through (V) are drawn without reference to stereochemistry.
  • the present disclosure includes all possible stereoisomers and includes not only racemic compounds but the individual enantiomers (enantiomerically pure compounds), individual diastereomers (diastereomerically pure compounds), and their non-racemic mixtures as well.
  • a compound is desired as a single enantiomer, such may be obtained by, e.g., stereospecific synthesis, as is known in the art.
  • the compound described herein, e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V) is non-stereogenic. In some embodiments, the compound described herein, e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), is racemic. In some embodiments, the compound described herein, e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), is enantiomerically enriched (one enantiomer is present in a higher percentage), including enantiomerically pure. In some embodiments, the compound described herein, e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), is provided as a single diastereomer.
  • the compound described herein e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)
  • the mixtures may include equal mixtures, or mixtures which are enriched with a particular diastereomer (one diastereomer is present in a higher percentage than another).
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is an agonist of a serotonin 5-HT 2 receptor.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is an agonist of a serotonin 5-HT 2A receptor.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compounds of the present disclosure e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the acid used to form the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) may be a monoacid, a diacid, a triacid, a tetraacid, or may contain a higher number of acid groups.
  • the acid groups may be, e.g., a carboxylic acid, a sulfonic acid, a phosphonic acid, or other acidic moieties containing at least one replaceable hydrogen atom.
  • acids for use in the preparation of the pharmaceutically acceptable (acid addition) salts disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, acetic acid, 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, phenylacetic acid, acylated amino acids, alginic acid, ascorbic acid, L-aspartic acid, sulfonic acids (e.g., benzenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, (+)-(lS)-camphor-10-sulfonic acid, ethane- 1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 2- hydroxy-ethanesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, naphthalene- 1 ,5-disulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, ethanedisulfonic acid, etc.), benzoic acids (e.g., benzoic acid, 4-acetamido
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is a benzenesulfonate salt, a tartrate salt, a hemi-fomarate salt, an acetate salt, a citrate salt, a malonate salt, a fumarate salt, a succinate salt, an oxalate salt, a benzoate salt, a salicylate salt, an ascorbate salt, a hydrochloride salt, a maleate salt, a malate salt, a methanesulfonate salt, a toluenesulfonate salt, a glucuronate salt, or a glutarate salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is a salt formed from a sulfonic acid (e.g., benzenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, (+)-(1S)-camphor-10-sulfonic acid, ethane- 1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, naphthalene-l,5-disulfonic acid, p- toluenesulfonic acid, ethanedisulfonic acid, etc.).
  • a sulfonic acid e.g., benzenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, (+)-(1S)-camphor-10-sulfonic acid, ethane- 1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid,
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is a salt formed from a benzoic acid (e.g., benzoic acid, 4-acetamidobenzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, salicylic acid, 4- amino-salicylic acid, etc.).
  • a benzoic acid e.g., benzoic acid, 4-acetamidobenzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, salicylic acid, 4- amino-salicylic acid, etc.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is a fatty acid salt.
  • the fatty acid used to make the fatty acid salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) may be a fatty monoacid or a fatty diacid, and may contain a fatty hydrocarbon portion made up of hydrogen and anywhere from 4, from 6, from 8, from 10, from 12, from 14, from 16, and up to 26, up to 24, up to 22, up to 20, up to 18 carbon atoms, which may be folly saturated or partially unsaturated.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is an adipate salt, a laurate salt, a linoleate salt, a myristate salt, a caprate salt, a stearate salt, an oleate salt, a caprylate salt, a palmitate salt, a sebacate salt, an undecylenate salt, or a caproate salt of the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the method includes:
  • solvents may be used in the disclosed methods, including one or more protic solvents, one or more aprotic solvents, or mixtures thereof.
  • the solvent(s) used in the method of preparing the salt is/are a protic solvent(s).
  • the solvent used in the method of preparing the salt is selected from the group consisting of methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, 2-butanol, acetone, butanone, dioxanes (1,4-dioxane), water, tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile (MeCN), ether solvents (e.g., t-butylmethyl ether (TBME)), hexane, heptane, octane, and combinations thereof.
  • the solvent is ethanol.
  • the solvent is 1,4-dioxane.
  • the solvent is acetonitrile.
  • the solvent is tetrahydrofuran.
  • Suitable acids for use in the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts may include those described heretofore.
  • the acid may be an inorganic acid such as hydrochloric acid, or an organic acid, with organic acids being preferred.
  • the acid is an organic acid selected from the group consisting of ascorbic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, malonic acid, (-)-L-malic acid, (+)-L-tartaric acid, methanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, succinic acid, oxalic acid, D-glucuronic acid, glutaric acid salt, and acetic acid.
  • the acid is an organic acid selected from the group consisting of benzenesulfonic acid, (+)-L-tartaric acid, fumaric acid, acetic acid, citric acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, oxalic acid, benzoic acid, and salicylic acid.
  • the acid is a fatty acid, such as adipic (hexandioic) acid, lauric (dodecanoic) acid, linoleic acid, myristic (tetradecanoic) acid, capric (decanoic) acid, stearic (octadecanoic) acid, oleic acid, caprylic (octanoic) acid, palmitic (hexadecenoic) acid, sebacic acid, undecylenic acid, caproic acid, etc., with particular mention being made to adipic (hexandioic) acid, lauric (dodecanoic) acid, linoleic acid, myristic (tetradecanoic) acid, capric (decanoic) acid, stearic (octadecanoic) acid, oleic acid, and caprylic (octanoic) acid.
  • adipic (hexandioic) acid la
  • a stoichiometric (or superstoichiometric) quantity of the acid is contacted with the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • a sub- stoichiometric (e.g., 0.5 molar equivalents) quantity of the acid is contacted with the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the use of sub-stoichiometric quantities of the acid may be desirable when, for example, the acid contains at least two acidic protons (e.g., two or more carboxylic acid groups) and the target salt is a hemi-acid salt.
  • the mixture is heated, e.g., refluxed, prior to cooling.
  • the mixture is cooled and the salt is precipitated out of the solution.
  • the salt is precipitated out of solution in crystalline form.
  • the salt is precipitated out of solution in amorphous form.
  • Isolation of the salt may be performed by various well-known isolation techniques, such as filtration, decantation, and the like.
  • the isolating step includes filtering the mixture.
  • compounds of the present disclosure e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, is in the form of a solvate.
  • solvate forms include, but are not limited to, hydrates, methanolates, ethanolates, isopropanolates, etc., with hydrates and ethanolates being preferred.
  • the solvate may be formed from stoichiometric or nonstoichiometric quantities of solvent molecules.
  • Solvates of the compounds herein may be in the form of isolable solvates.
  • the compound may be a monohydrate, a dihydrate, etc.
  • Sol vates of the compounds herein also include solution- phase forms.
  • the present disclosure provides solution-phase compositions of the compounds of the present disclosure, or any pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, which are in solvated form, preferably folly solvated form.
  • the compound of the present disclosure e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, or prodrug thereof, is provided in crystalline form, e.g., as determined by XRPD.
  • pharmaceutical compositions may be prepared from compounds of Formula (I) through (V), in crystalline form including in one or more polymorphic forms, and may be used for treatment as set forth herein. Crystalline forms are advantageous in terms of stability and providing well- defined physical properties, which is desirable for pharmaceutical preparation and administration.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are provided in amorphous form, e.g., as determined by XRPD.
  • pharmaceutical compositions may be prepared from compounds of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, or prodrug thereof, in one or more amorphic forms, and may be used for treatment as set forth herein.
  • Amorphous forms typically possess higher aqueous solubility and rates of dissolution compared to their crystalline counterparts, and thus may be well suited for quick acting dosage forms adapted to rapidly release the active agent, such as for orodispersible dosage forms (ODxs), immediate release (IR) dosage forms, and the like.
  • ODxs orodispersible dosage forms
  • IR immediate release
  • Compounds of the present disclosure may generally be prepared according to, or analogous to, the general synthetic routes shown in Fig. 1, or the synthetic routes exemplified herein. Other synthetic routes may also be used according to techniques and procedures known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • compositions comprising a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may contain one, or more than one, compound of the present disclosure.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles” may be vehicles approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in mammals, such as humans.
  • vehicle refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient, or carrier with which a compound or salt thereof of the present disclosure is formulated for administration to a mammal.
  • Such pharmaceutical vehicles can be liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like.
  • the pharmaceutical vehicles can be water, saline, gum acacia, gelatin, starch paste, talc, keratin, colloidal silica, urea, and the like.
  • auxiliary, stabilizing, solubilizing, thickening, lubricating, coloring agents, sweetening agents, and other pharmaceutical additives may be included in the disclosed compositions, for example those set forth hereinafter.
  • the pharmaceutical vehicle can include an acid, such as those described heretofore for use in forming the pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms of the present disclosure, with specific mention being made to citric acid and/or tartaric acid.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may comprise a single compound of Formula (I) through (V) or a mixture of compounds of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be formed from an isotopologue mixture of the disclosed compounds.
  • a subject compound of Formula (I) through (V) may be present in the pharmaceutical composition at a purity of at least 50% by weight, at least 60% by weight, at least 70% by weight, at least 80% by weight, at least 90% by weight, at least 95% by weight, at least 99% by weight, based on a total weight of isotopologues of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) present in the pharmaceutical composition (i.e., the isotopic purity).
  • the composition comprises a subject compound of Formula (I) through (V), and is substantially free of other isotopologues of the subject compound, in either free base or salt form, e.g., the composition has less than 20, 15, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1 or 0.5 mole percent of other isotopologues of the subject compound.
  • any position in the compound having deuterium has a minimum deuterium incorporation that is greater than that found naturally occurring in hydrogen (about 0.016 atom %). In some embodiments, any position in the compound having deuterium has a minimum deuterium incorporation of at least 10 atom %, at least 20 atom %, at least 25 atom %, at least 30 atom %, at least 40 atom %, at least 45 atom %, at least 50 atom %, at least 60 atom %, at least 70 atom %, at least 80 atom %, at least 90 atom %, at least 95 atom %, at least 99 atom % at the site of deuteration.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be formulated with an enantiomerically pure compound of the present disclosure, e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a racemic mixture of the compound(s).
  • a racemic compound of Formula (I) through (V) may contain about 50% of the R- and S-stereoisomers based on a molar ratio (about 48 to about 52 mol %, or about a 1:1 ratio)) of one of the isomers.
  • a composition, medicament, or method of treatment may involve combining separately produced compounds of the R- and S-stereoisomers in an approximately equal molar ratio (e.g., about 48 to 52%).
  • a medicament or pharmaceutical composition may contain a mixture of separate compounds of the R- and S-stereoisomers in different ratios.
  • the pharmaceutical composition contains an excess (greater than 50%) of the R- enantiomer. Suitable molar ratios of R/S may be from about 1.5:1, 2:1, 3:1, 4:1, 5:1, 10:1, or higher.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may contain an excess of the S- enantiomer, with the ratios provided for R/S reversed. Other suitable amounts of R/S may be selected.
  • the R-enantiomer may be enriched, e.g., may be present in amounts of at least about 55% to 100%, or at least 65%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, about 95%, about 98%, or 100%.
  • the S-enantiomer may be enriched, e.g., in amounts of at least about 55% to 100%, or at least 65%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, about 95%, about 98%, or 100%. Ratios between all these exemplary embodiments as well as greater than and less than them while still within the disclosure, all are included.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may be formulated with one or more polymorphs of the compounds of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, or prodrug thereof, including crystalline and/or amorphous polymorphs of the compounds or salts thereof.
  • compositions may be generally provided herein which comprise about 0.001 to about 1000 mg, about 1 to about 500 mg, about 2 to about 100 mg, about 0.001 mg, about 0.01 mg, about 0.1 mg, about 1 mg, about 2 mg, about 3 mg, about 5 mg, about 10 mg, about 20 mg, about 30 mg, about 40 mg, about 50 mg, about 75 mg, about 100 mg, about 150 mg, about 200 mg, about 300 mg, about 400 mg, about 500 mg of one or more compounds as disclosed herein (on active basis).
  • the quantity of compound of Formula (I) through (V) (on active basis) in a unit dose preparation may be varied or adjusted within the above ranges as deemed appropriate using sound medical judgment, according to the particular application, administration route, potency of the active ingredient, etc.
  • the composition can, if desired, also contain other compatible therapeutic agents/active ingredients.
  • the pharmaceutical composition comprises at least 0.1% by weight, at least 0.5% by weight, at least 1% by weight, at least 5% by weight, at least 10% by weight, at least 15% by weight, at least 20% by weight, at least 25% by weight, at least 30% by weight, at least 35% by weight, at least 40% by weight, at least 45% by weight, at least 50% by weight, and up to 99.9% by weight, up to 99.5% by weight, up to 99% by weight, up to 98% by weight, up to 97% by weight, up to 95% by weight, up to 90% by weight, up to 85% by weight, up to 80% by weight, up to 75% by weight, up to 70% by weight, up to 65% by weight, up to 60% by weight, up to 55% by weight of the compound of Formula (I) through (V), based on a total weight of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be administered at once, or multiple times at intervals of time. It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment may vary with the age, weight, and condition of the patient being treated, and may be determined empirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from in vivo or in vitro test or diagnostic data. It is further understood that for any particular individual, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the formulations.
  • the compounds may be administered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time, including throughout the duration of the patient's life in order to ameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient's disease or condition.
  • the compounds may be given continuously or temporarily suspended for a certain length of time (i.e., a “drug holiday”).
  • a maintenance dose is administered if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or the frequency of administration, or both, can be reduced, as a function of the symptoms, to a level at which the improved disorder is retained. Patients can, however, require intermittent treatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of symptoms.
  • compositions can take the form of capsules, tablets, pills, pellets, lozenges, powders, granules, syrups, elixirs, solutions, suspensions, emulsions, suppositories, or sustained-release formulations thereof, or any other form suitable for administration to a mammal.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are formulated for administration in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for oral, intravenous, intradermal, or inhalation administration, or other routes of administration as set forth herein, to humans. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical vehicles and methods for formulation thereof are described in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Alfonso R. Gennaro ed., Mack Publishing Co.
  • Liquid form preparations include solutions and emulsions, for example, water, water/propylene glycol solutions, or organic solvents.
  • the compounds and compositions of the present disclosure and pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles may be sterile.
  • an aqueous medium is employed as a vehicle e.g., when the subject compound is administered intravenously or via inhalation, such as water, saline solutions, and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions.
  • aqueous medium such as water, saline solutions, and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present disclosure may be specially formulated for administration in solid, semi-solid, or liquid form, including those adapted for the following:
  • A. Oral administration for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, films, or capsules, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absorption, boluses, powders, granules, syrups, pastes for application to the tongue;
  • Parenteral administration for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous, intradermal, or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained release formulation;
  • Topical application/transdermal administration for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled release patch or spray applied to the skin, or orifices and/or mucosal surfaces such as intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam;
  • Modified release dosage forms including delayed-, extended-, prolonged-, sustained-, pulsatile-, controlled-, accelerated-, fast-, targeted-, programmed-release, and gastric retention dosage forms, such modified release dosage forms can be prepared according to conventional methods and techniques known to those skilled in the art (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra; Modified-Release Drug Delivery Technology, Rathbone et al., Eds., Drugs and the Pharmaceutical Science, Marcel Dekker, Inc.: New York, N.Y., 2002; Vol. 126); and
  • Inhalation administration for example as an aerosol, preferably a mist.
  • Tamper resistant dosage forms/packaging of any of the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions are contemplated.
  • oral administration includes gastric (enteral) delivery, for example whereby the medication is taken by mouth and swallowed, as well as intraoral administration such as through the mucosal linings of the oral cavity, e.g., buccal, lingual, and sublingual administration.
  • Suitable oral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, tablets, capsules, pills, troches, lozenges, pastilles, cachets, pellets, medicated chewing gum, granules, bulk powders, effervescent or non-effervescent powders or granules, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutions, wafers, films, sprinkles, elixirs, and syrups.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may contain one or more pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles (e.g., carriers or excipients), including, but not limited to, binders, fillers, diluents, disintegrants, wetting agents, lubricants, glidants, coloring agents, dye-migration inhibitors, sweetening agents, preservatives, antioxidants, lyoprotectants, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, complexing agents, and flavoring agents.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles e.g., carriers or excipients
  • binders binders, fillers, diluents, disintegrants, wetting agents, lubricants, glidants, coloring agents, dye-migration inhibitors, sweetening agents, preservatives, antioxidants, lyoprotectants, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, complexing agents, and flavoring agents.
  • compositions of the present disclosure may be in orodispersible dosage forms (ODxs), including orally disintegrating tablets (ODTs) (also sometimes referred to as fast disintegrating tablets, orodispersible tablets, or fast dispersible tablets) or orodispersible films (ODFs) (or wafers).
  • ODTs orally disintegrating tablets
  • ODFs orodispersible films
  • Such dosage forms allow for pre-gastric absorption of the compounds herein, e.g., when administered intraorally through the mucosal linings of the oral cavity, e.g., buccal, lingual, and sublingual administration, for increased bioavailability and faster onset compared to oral administration through the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Orodispersible dosage forms can be prepared by different techniques, such as freeze drying (lyophilization), molding, spray drying, mass extrusion or compressing.
  • the orally disintegrating tablets are prepared by lyophilization.
  • the orodispersible dosage forms disintegrate in less than about 90 seconds, in less than about 60 seconds, in less than about 30 seconds, in less than about 20, in less than about 10 seconds, in less than about 5 seconds, or in less than about 2 seconds after being received in the oral cavity.
  • the orodispersible dosage forms dissolve in less than about 90 seconds, in less than about 60 seconds, or in less than about 30 seconds after being received in the oral cavity.
  • the orodispersible dosage forms disperse in less than about 90 seconds, in less than about 60 seconds, in less than about 30 seconds, in less than about 20, in less than about 10 seconds, in less than about 5 seconds, or in less than about 2 seconds after being received in the oral cavity.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of orodispersible dosage forms, such as oral disintegrating tablets (ODTs), having a disintegration time according to the United States Phamacopeia (USP) disintegration test ⁇ 701> of not more than about 30 seconds, not more than about 20, not more than about 10 seconds, not more than about 5 seconds, not more than about 2 seconds.
  • ODTs oral disintegrating tablets
  • USP United States Phamacopeia
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of lyophilized orodispersible dosage forms, such as lyopholized ODTs.
  • the lyophilized orodispersible dosage forms are created by creating a porous matrix by subliming the water from pre-frozen aqueous formulation of the drug containing matrix- forming agents and other vehicles such as those set forth herein, e.g., one or more lyoprotectants, preservatives, antioxidants, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, flavoring agents, etc.
  • the orodispersible dosage form comprises two component frameworks of a lyophilized matrix system that work together to ensure the development of a successful formulation.
  • the first component is a water-soluble polymer such as gelatin, dextran, alginate, and maltodextrin. This component maintains the shape and provides mechanical strength to the dosage form (binder).
  • the second constituent is a matrix-supporting/disintegration-enhancing agent such as sucrose, lactose, mannitol, xylitol, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium diphosphate, and/or starch, which acts by cementing the porous framework, provided by the water-soluble polymer and accelerates the disintegration of the orodispersible dosage form.
  • the lyophilized orodispersible dosage form includes gelatin and mannitol.
  • the lyophilized orodispersible dosage form (e.g., lyophilized ODT) includes gelatin, mannitol, and one or more of a lyoprotectant, a preservative, an antioxidant, a stabilizing agent, a solubilizing agent, a flavoring agent, etc., with particular mention being made to citric acid.
  • a lyoprotectant e.g., lyophilized ODT
  • a preservative e.g., an antioxidant, a stabilizing agent, a solubilizing agent, a flavoring agent, etc.
  • a solubilizing agent e.g., a flavoring agent, etc.
  • the ODT formulation (e.g., Zydis® orally dispersible tablets) includes one or more water-soluble polymers, such as gelatin, one or more matrix materials, fil lers, or diluents such as mannitol, a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, and optionally a lyoprotectant, a preservative, an antioxidant, a stabilizing agent, a solubilizing agent, and/or a flavoring agent.
  • water-soluble polymers such as gelatin, one or more matrix materials, fil lers, or diluents such as mannitol, a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, and optionally a lyoprotectant, a preservative, an antioxidant, a stabilizing
  • the ODT formulation (e.g., Zydis® orally dispersible tablets) includes gelatin, mannitol, a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, and an organic acid, non-limiting examples of which are citric acid and/or tartaric acid, or any suitable organic acid set forth herein.
  • an organic acid non-limiting examples of which are citric acid and/or tartaric acid, or any suitable organic acid set forth herein.
  • the pharmaceutical composition is in the form of lyophilized orodispersible film (ODF) (or wafer).
  • ODF lyophilized orodispersible film
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of lyophilized ODFs protected for the long-term storage by a specialty packaging excluding moisture, oxygen, and light.
  • the lyophilized ODFs are created by creating a porous matrix by subliming the water from pre-frozen aqueous formulation of the drug containing matrix-forming agents and other vehicles such as those set forth herein, e.g., one or more of a lyoprotectant, a preservative, an antioxidant, a stabilizing agent, a solubilizing agent, a flavoring agent, etc.
  • the lyophilized ODF includes a thin water-soluble film matrix.
  • the ODFs comprise two component frameworks of a lyophilized matrix system that work together to ensure the development of a successful formulation.
  • the first component is a water- soluble polymer such as gelatin, dextran, alginate, and maltodextrin. This component maintains the shape and provides mechanical strength to the film/wafer (binder).
  • the second constituent is matrix-supporting/ disintegration-enhancing agents such as sucrose and mannitol, which acts by cementing the porous framework, provided by the water-soluble polymer and accelerates the disintegration of the wafer.
  • the lyophilized ODFs include gelatin and mannitol. In some embodiments, the lyophilized ODFs include gelatin, mannitol, and one or more of a lyoprotectant, a preservative, an antioxidant, a stabilizing agent, a solubilizing agent, a flavoring agent, etc., with particular mention being made to citric acid.
  • the ODF (or wafer) can comprise a monolayer, bilayer, or trilayer.
  • the monolayer ODF contains an active agent and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles (e.g., carrier or excipients).
  • the bilayer ODF contains one or more excipients, such as a solubilizing agent, in a first layer and an active agent in the second layer. This configuration allows the active agent to be stored separately from the excipients and can increase the stability of the active agent and optionally increase the shelf life of the composition compared to the case where the excipients and the active agent were contained in a single layer.
  • each of the layers may be different or two of the layers, such as the upper and lower layers, may have substantially the same composition.
  • the lower and upper layers surround a core layer containing the active agent.
  • the lower and upper layers may contain one or more excipients, such as a solubilizing agent.
  • the lower and upper layers have the same composition.
  • the lower and upper layers may contain different excipients or different amounts of the same excipient.
  • the core layer typically contains the active agent, optionally with one or more excipients.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions in orodispersible dosage forms may contain one or more pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles (e.g., carriers or excipients).
  • pharmaceutical compositions in orodispersible dosage forms include one or more of pharmaceutically acceptable a lyoprotectant, a preservative, an antioxidant, a stabilizing agent, a solubilizing agent, a flavoring agent, etc.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable lyoprotectants include, but are not limited to, disaccharides such as sucrose and trehalose, anionic polymers such as sulfobutylether-P- cyclodextrin (SBECD) and hyaluronic acid, and hydroxylated cyclodextrins.
  • disaccharides such as sucrose and trehalose
  • anionic polymers such as sulfobutylether-P- cyclodextrin (SBECD) and hyaluronic acid
  • hydroxylated cyclodextrins examples include, but are not limited to, disaccharides such as sucrose and trehalose, anionic polymers such as sulfobutylether-P- cyclodextrin (SBECD) and hyaluronic acid, and hydroxylated cyclodextrins.
  • SBECD sulfobutylether-P- cyclodextrin
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable preservatives include, but are not limited to, glycerin, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic acid, sodium benzoate and alcohol.
  • antioxidants which may act to further enhance stability of the composition, include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine or salts thereof (cysteine hydrochloride), sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha- tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine or salts thereof (cysteine hydrochloride), sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate,
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable stabilizing agents include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, fatty alcohols, alcohols, long chain fatty acid esters, long chain ethers, hydrophilic derivatives of fatty acids, polyvinyl pyrrolidones, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl alcohols, hydrocarbons, hydrophobic polymers, moisture-absorbing polymers, glycerol, methionine, monothioglycerol, ascorbic acid, citric acid, polysorbate, arginine, cyclodextrins, microcrystalline cellulose, modified celluloses (e.g., carboxymethylcellulose, sodium salt), sorbitol, and cellulose gel.
  • fatty acids fatty alcohols, alcohols, long chain fatty acid esters, long chain ethers, hydrophilic derivatives of fatty acids, polyvinyl pyrrolidones, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl alcohols, hydrocarbons, hydrophobic polymers, moisture-absorbing polymers
  • solubilizing agents include, but are not limited to, citric acid, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium stearyl fumarate, methacrylic acid copolymer LD, methylcellulose, sodium lauryl sulfate, polyoxyl 40 stearate, purified shellac, sodium dehydroacetate, fumaric acid, DL-malic acid, L-ascorbyl stearate, L-asparagine acid, adipic acid, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer E, propylene glycol alginate, casein, casein sodium, a carboxyvinyl polymer, carboxymethylethylcellulose, powdered agar, guar gum, succinic acid, copolyvidone, cellulose acetate phthalate, tartaric acid, dioctylsodium sulfosuccinate, zein, powdered skim milk,
  • Flavoring agents include natural flavors extracted from plants, such as fruits, and synthetic blends of compounds which produce a pleasant taste sensation or taste masking effect.
  • flavoring agents include, but are not limited to, aspartame, saccharin (as sodium, potassium or calcium saccharin), cyclamate (as a sodium, potassium or calcium salt), sucralose, acesulfame-K, thaumatin, neohisperidin, dihydrochalcone, ammoniated glycyrrhizin, dextrose, maltodextrin, fructose, levulose, sucrose, glucose, wild orange peel, citric acid, tartaric acid, oil of Wintergreen, oil of peppermint, methyl salicylate, oil of spearmint, oil of sassafras, oil of clove, cinnamon, anethole, menthol, thymol, eugenol, eucalyptol, lemon, lime, and lemon-lime.
  • Cyclodextrins such as a-cyclodextrin, P-cyclodextrin, y-cyclodextrin, methyl-p- cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl p-cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl-P-cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl y- cyclodextrin, sulfated P-cyclodextrin, sulfated a-cyclodextrin, sulfobutyl ether ⁇ -cyclodextrin, or other solubilized derivatives can also be advantageously used to enhance delivery of compositions described herein.
  • compositions adapted for oral administration may be formulated with various vehicles such as those set forth herein.
  • suitable vehicles may include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, diluents, disintegrants, wetting agents, lubricants, glidants, coloring agents, dye-migration inhibitors, sweetening agents, preservatives, antioxidants, stabilizing agents, solubilizing agents, and flavoring agents.
  • Binders or granulators impart cohesiveness to a tablet to ensure the tablet remains intact after compression.
  • Suitable binders or granulators include, but are not limited to, starches, such as com starch, potato starch, and pre-gelatinized starch (e.g., STARCH 1500); gelatin; sugars, such as sucrose, glucose, dextrose, molasses, and lactose; natural and synthetic gums, such as acacia, alginic acid, alginates, extract of Irish moss, Panwar gum, ghatti gum, mucilage of isabgol husks, carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), Veegum, larch arabogalactan, powdered tragacanth, and guar gum; celluloses, such as ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxy
  • Suitable fillers include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.
  • the binder or filler may be present, e.g., from about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90%, about 99% by weight in- the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein, or any range therebetween.
  • Suitable diluents include, but are not limited to, dicalcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, lactose, sorbitol, sucrose, inositol, cellulose, kaolin, mannitol, sodium chloride, dry starch, and powdered sugar.
  • Certain diluents, such as mannitol, lactose, sorbitol, sucrose, and inositol when present in sufficient quantity, can impart properties to some compressed tablets that permit disintegration in the mouth by chewing. Such compressed tablets can be used as chewable tablets.
  • Suitable disintegrants include, but are not limited to, agar; bentonite; celluloses, such as methylcellulose and carboxymethylcellulose; wood products; natural sponge; cation- exchange resins; alginic acid; gums, such as guar gum and Veegum HV; citrus pulp; cross- linked celluloses, such as croscarmellose; cross-linked polymers, such as crospovidone; cross- linked starches; calcium carbonate; microcrystalline cellulose, such as sodium starch glycolate; polacrilin potassium; starches, such as com starch, potato starch, tapioca starch, and pre- gelatinized starch; clays; aligns; and mixtures thereof.
  • the amount of disintegrant in the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein varies upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may contain, e.g., from about 0.5 to about 15% or from about 1 to about 5% by weight of a disintegrant.
  • Suitable lubricants include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate; magnesium stearate; mineral oil; light mineral oil; glycerin; sorbitol; mannitol; glycols, such as glycerol behenate and polyethylene glycol (PEG); stearic acid; sodium lauryl sulfate; sodium stearyl fumarate; talc; hydrogenated vegetable oil, including peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, com oil, and soybean oil; zinc stearate; ethyl oleate; ethyl laureate; agar; starch; lycopodium; silica or silica gels, such as AEROSIL® 200 (W.R.
  • compositions disclosed herein may contain, e.g., about 0.1 to about 5% by weight of a lubricant.
  • Suitable glidants include colloidal silicon dioxide, CAB-O-SIL® (Cabot Co. of Boston, Mass.), and asbestos-free talc.
  • Coloring agents include any of the approved, certified, water soluble FD&C dyes, and water insoluble FD&C dyes suspended on alumina hydrate, and color lakes and mixtures thereof.
  • a color lake is the combination by adsorption of a water-soluble dye to a hydrous oxide of a heavy metal, resulting in an insoluble form of the dye.
  • Sweetening agents include sucrose, lactose, mannitol, syrups, glycerin, and artificial sweeteners, such as saccharin and aspartame.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include gelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, and surfactants, such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate (TWEEN® 20), polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate 80 (TWEEN® 80), and triethanolamine oleate.
  • surfactants such as polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate (TWEEN® 20), polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate 80 (TWEEN® 80), and triethanolamine oleate.
  • Suspending and dispersing agents include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum, acacia, sodium carbomethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, and polyvinylpyrolidone.
  • Preservatives include glycerin, methyl and propylparaben, benzoic add, sodium benzoate and alcohol.
  • Wetting agents include propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurate, and polyoxyethylene lauryl ether.
  • Solvents include glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol, and syrup.
  • non-aqueous liquids utilized in emulsions include mineral oil and cottonseed oil.
  • Organic acids include citric and tartaric acid.
  • Sources of carbon dioxide include sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate.
  • compositions herein containing citric acid which may play multiple roles as a stabilizing agent, as a solubilizing agent to provide fast dissolution of the active for rapid onset, etc., particularly for dosage forms adapted for rapid onset and a shorter duration of drug action, such as orodispersible dosage forms (e.g., ODTs and ODFs).
  • compositions herein may be in the form of compressed tablets, tablet triturates, chewable lozenges, rapidly dissolving tablets, multiple compressed tablets, or enteric-coating tablets, sugar-coated, or film-coated tablets.
  • Enteric-coated tablets are compressed tablets coated with substances that resist the action of stomach acid but dissolve or disintegrate in the intestine, thus protecting the active ingredients from the acidic environment of the stomach.
  • Enteric-coatings include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, fats, phenylsalicylate, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac, and cellulose acetate phthalates.
  • Sugar- coated tablets are compressed tablets surrounded by a sugar coating, which may be beneficial in covering up objectionable tastes or odors and in protecting the tablets from oxidation.
  • Film- coated tablets are compressed tablets that are covered with a thin layer or film of a water- soluble material. Film coatings include, but are not limited to, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol 4000, and cellulose acetate phthalate. Film coating imparts the same general characteristics as sugar coating.
  • Multiple compressed tablets are compressed tablets made by more than one compression cycle, including layered tablets, and press-coated or dry-coated tablets.
  • the tablet dosage forms may be prepared from the active ingredient in powdered, crystalline, or granular forms, alone or in combination with one or more vehicles (e.g., carriers or excipients) described herein, including binders, disintegrants, controlled-release polymers, lubricants, diluents, and/or colorants. Flavoring and sweetening agents are especially useful in the formation of chewable tablets and lozenges.
  • compositions in modified release dosage forms which comprise a compound as disclosed herein and one or more release controlling excipients or carriers as described herein.
  • Suitable modified release dosage vehicles include, but are not limited to, hydrophilic or hydrophobic matrix devices, water-soluble separating layer coatings, enteric coatings, osmotic devices, multiparticulate devices, and combinations thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise non-release controlling excipients or carriers.
  • compositions in enteric coated dosage forms which comprise a compound as disclosed herein and one or more release controlling excipients or earners for use in an enteric coated dosage form.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise non-release controlling excipients or carriers.
  • pharmaceutical compositions in effervescent dosage forms which comprise a compound as disclosed herein and one or more release controlling excipients or carriers for use in an effervescent dosage form.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise non-release controlling excipients or carriers.
  • compositions in a dosage form that has an instant releasing component and at least one delayed releasing component, and is capable of giving a discontinuous release of the compound in the form of at least two consecutive pulses separated in time from about 0.1 up to about 24 hours (e.g., about 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 10, 22, or 24 hours).
  • the pharmaceutical compositions comprise a compound as disclosed herein and one or more release controlling and non-release controlling excipients or carriers, such as those excipients or carriers suitable for a disruptable semipermeable membrane and as swellable substances.
  • compositions in a dosage form for oral administration to a subject which comprise a compound, salt, or solvate as disclosed herein and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles (e.g., excipients or carriers), enclosed in an intermediate reactive layer comprising a gastric juice-resistant polymeric layered material partially neutralized with alkali and having cation exchange capacity and a gastric juice- resistant outer layer.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles e.g., excipients or carriers
  • the dosage form may be an immediate release (IR) dosage form, examples of which include, but are not limited to, an immediate release (IR) tablets or an immediate release (IR) capsule.
  • dosage forms adapted for immediate release may include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles which readily disperse, dissolve, or otherwise breakdown in the gastric environment so as not to delay or prolong dissolution/ absorption of the active ingredient(s).
  • pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles for immediate release dosage forms include, but are not limited to, one or more binders/granulators, matrix materials, fillers, diluents, disintegrants, dispersing agents, solubilizing agents, lubricants, and/or performance modifiers.
  • the immediate release (IR) dosage form is an immediate release (IR) tablet comprising one or more of microcrystalline cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, magnesium stearate, mannitol, crospovidone, and sodium stearyl fumarate.
  • the immediate release (IR) dosage form comprises microcrystalline cellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and magnesium stearate.
  • the immediate release (IR) dosage form comprises mannitol, crospovidone, and sodium stearyl fumarate.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may be disclosed as soft or hard capsules, which can be made from gelatin, methylcellulose, starch, or calcium alginate.
  • the hard gelatin capsule also known as dry-filled capsule (DFC) or powder in capsule (PIC), consists of two sections, one slipping over the other, thus completely enclosing the active ingredient.
  • the soft elastic capsule (SEC) is a soft, globular shell, such as a gelatin shell, which is plasticized by the addition of glycerin, sorbitol, or a similar polyol.
  • the soft gelatin shells may contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • Suitable preservatives are those as described herein, including methyl- and propyl-parabens, and sorbic acid.
  • the liquid, semisolid, and solid dosage forms disclosed herein may be encapsulated in a capsule. Suitable liquid and semisolid dosage forms include solutions and suspensions in propylene carbonate, vegetable oils, or triglycerides.
  • the capsules may also be coated as known by those of skill in the art in order to modify or sustain dissolution of the active ingredient.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of immediate- release capsules for oral administration, and may farther comprise cellulose, iron oxides, lactose, magnesium stearate, and sodium starch glycolate.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of delayed- release capsules for oral administration, and may farther comprise cellulose, ethylcellulose, gelatin, hypromellose, iron oxide, and titanium dioxide.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of enteric coated delayed-release tablets for oral administration, and may farther comprise carnauba wax, crospovidone, diacetylated monoglycerides, ethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hypromellose phthalate, magnesium stearate, mannitol, sodium hydroxide, sodium stearyl fumarate, talc, titanium dioxide, and yellow ferric oxide.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are in the form of enteric coated delayed-release tablets for oral administration, and may further comprise calcium stearate, crospovidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, iron oxide, mannitol, methacrylic acid copolymer, polysorbate 80, povidone, propylene glycol, sodium carbonate, sodium lauryl sulfate, titanium dioxide, and triethyl citrate.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be disclosed in liquid and semisolid dosage forms, including emulsions, solutions, suspensions, elixirs, and syrups.
  • An emulsion is a two-phase system, in which one liquid is dispersed in the form of small globules throughout another liquid, which can be oil-in-water or water-in-oil.
  • Emulsions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable non-aqueous liquids or solvent, emulsifying agent, and preservative.
  • Suspensions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable suspending agent and preservative.
  • Aqueous alcoholic solutions may include a pharmaceutically acceptable acetal, such as a di(lower alkyl) acetal of a lower alkyl aldehyde (the term “lower” means an alkyl having between 1 and 6 carbon atoms), e.g., acetaldehyde diethyl acetal; and a water-miscible solvent having one or more hydroxyl groups, such as propylene glycol and ethanol.
  • Elixirs are clear, sweetened, and hydroalcoholic solutions.
  • Syrups are concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example, sucrose, and may also contain a preservative.
  • a solution in a polyethylene glycol may be diluted with a sufficient quantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e.g., water, to be measured conveniently for administration.
  • liquid and semisolid dosage forms include, but are not limited to, those containing the active ingredient(s) disclosed herein (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)), and a dialkylated mono- or poly-alkylene glycol, including, 1,2-dimethoxymethane, diglyme, triglyme, tetraglyme, polyethylene glycol-350-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol- 550-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-750-dimethyl ether, wherein 350, 550, and 750 refer to the approximate average molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol.
  • a dialkylated mono- or poly-alkylene glycol including, 1,2-dimethoxymethane, diglyme, triglyme, tetraglyme, polyethylene glycol-350-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol- 550-dimethyl ether, polyethylene glycol-750-dimethyl ether, wherein 350, 550, and
  • formulations may further comprise one or more antioxidants, such as butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), propyl gallate, vitamin E, hydroquinone, hydroxycoumarins, ethanolamine, lecithin, cephalin, ascorbic acid, malic acid, sorbitol, phosphoric acid, bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, thiodipropionic acid and its esters, and dithiocarbamates.
  • antioxidants such as butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), propyl gallate, vitamin E, hydroquinone, hydroxycoumarins, ethanolamine, lecithin, cephalin, ascorbic acid, malic acid, sorbitol, phosphoric acid, bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, thiodipropionic acid and its esters, and dithiocarbamates.
  • antioxidants such as but
  • examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (
  • Cyclodextrins such as ⁇ -cyclodextrin, ⁇ -cyclodextrin, y-cyclodextrin, methyl-0- cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl 0-cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl-0-cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl y- cyclodextrin, sulfated 0-cyclodextrin, sulfated a-cyclodextrin, sulfobutyl ether 0-cyclodextrin, or other solubilized derivatives can also be advantageously used to enhance delivery of compositions described herein.
  • compositions disclosed herein for oral administration may be also disclosed in the forms of liposomes, micelles, microspheres, or nanosystems.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be disclosed as non- effervescent or effervescent, granules and powders, to be reconstituted into a liquid dosage form.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients used in the non-effervescent granules or powders may include diluents, sweeteners, and wetting agents.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients used in the effervescent granules or powders may include organic acids and a source of carbon dioxide.
  • Coloring and flavoring agents can be used in any of the disclosed dosage forms.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be co-formulated with other active ingredients which do not impair the desired therapeutic action, or with substances that supplement the desired action, such as hydrocortisone.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be administered parenterally by injection, infusion, perfusion, or implantation, for local or systemic administration.
  • Parenteral administration includes, but is not limited to, intravenous, intradermal, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral, intrastemal, intracranial, intramuscular, intrasynovial, and subcutaneous administration.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be formulated in any dosage forms that are suitable for parenteral administration, including solutions, suspensions, emulsions, micelles, liposomes, microspheres, nanosystems, and solid forms suitable for solutions or suspensions in liquid prior to injection.
  • dosage forms can be prepared according to conventional methods known to those skilled in the art of pharmaceutical science (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra).
  • compositions intended for parenteral administration may include one or more pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles (e.g., carriers and excipients), including, but not limited to, aqueous vehicles, water-miscible vehicles, non-aqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents or preservatives against the growth of microorganisms, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, isotonic agents, buffering agents, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, wetting or emulsifying agents, complexing agents, sequestering or chelating agents, cryoprotectants, lyoprotectants, thickening agents, pH adjusting agents, and inert gases.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles e.g., carriers and excipients
  • Suitable aqueous vehicles include, but are not limited to, water, saline, physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS), sodium chloride injection, Ringers injection, isotonic dextrose injection, sterile water injection, dextrose and lactated Ringers injection.
  • Non-aqueous vehicles include, but are not limited to, fixed oils of vegetable origin, castor oil, com oil, cottonseed oil, olive oil, peanut oil, peppermint oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, soybean oil, hydrogenated vegetable oils, hydrogenated soybean oil, and medium-chain triglycerides of coconut oil, and palm seed oil.
  • Water-miscible vehicles include, but are not limited to, ethanol, 1,3 -butanediol, liquid polyethylene glycol (e.g., polyethylene glycol 300 and polyethylene glycol 400), propylene glycol, glycerin, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, dimethylacetamide, and dimethylsulfoxide.
  • Suitable antimicrobial agents or preservatives include, but are not limited to, phenols, cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol, chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzates, thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, methyl- and propyl-parabens, and sorbic acid.
  • Suitable isotonic agents include, but are not limited to, sodium chloride, glycerin, and dextrose.
  • Suitable buffering agents include, but are not limited to, phosphate and citrate.
  • Suitable antioxidants are those as described herein, including bisulfite and sodium metabisulfite.
  • Suitable local anesthetics include, but are not limited to, procaine hydrochloride.
  • Suitable suspending and dispersing agents are those as described herein, including sodium carboxymethylcelluose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, and polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include those described herein, including polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate, polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate 80, and triethanolamine oleate.
  • Suitable sequestering or chelating agents include, but are not limited to, EDTA.
  • Suitable pH adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid, and lactic acid.
  • Suitable complexing agents include, but are not limited to, cyclodextrins, including a-cyclodextrin, ⁇ -cyclodextrin, methyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl-3- cyclodextrin/hydroxypropyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin, sulfobutylether- fycyclodextrin, and sulfobutylether 7-O-cyclodextrin (CAPTISOL®, CyDex, Lenexa, Kans.).
  • cyclodextrins including a-cyclodextrin, ⁇ -cyclodextrin, methyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin, hydroxypropyl-3- cyclodextrin/hydroxypropyl- ⁇ -cyclodextrin, sulfobutylether- fycyclodextrin, and sulfobutylether 7-O-cyclo
  • compositions disclosed herein may be formulated for single or multiple dosage administration.
  • the single dosage formulations are packaged in an ampule, a vial, or a syringe.
  • the multiple dosage parenteral formulations must contain an antimicrobial agent at bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations. All parenteral formulations must be sterile, as known and practiced in the art.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are disclosed as ready-to-use sterile solutions.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are disclosed as sterile dry soluble products, including lyophilized powders and hypodermic tablets, to be reconstituted with a vehicle prior to use.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are disclosed as ready-to-use sterile suspensions.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are disclosed as sterile dry insoluble products to be reconstituted with a vehicle prior to use.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are disclosed as ready-to-use sterile emulsions.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a suspension, solid, semi-solid, or thixotropic liquid, for administration as an implanted depot.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein are dispersed in a solid inner matrix, which is surrounded by an outer polymeric membrane that is insoluble in body fluids but allows the active ingredient in the pharmaceutical compositions to diffuse through.
  • Fatty acid salts of the compounds of Formula (I) through (V) may be well-suited for such dosage forms.
  • Suitable inner matrixes include polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, plasticized or unplasticized polyvinylchloride, plasticized nylon, plasticized polyethyleneterephthalate, natural rubber, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polyethylene, ethylene-vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethylsiloxanes, silicone carbonate copolymers, hydrophilic polymers, such as hydrogels of esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid, collagen, cross-linked polyvinylalcohol, and cross-linked partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate.
  • Suitable outer polymeric membranes include polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymers, ethylene/vinylacetate copolymers, silicone rubbers, polydimethyl siloxanes, neoprene rubber, chlorinated polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, vinylchloride copolymers with vinyl acetate, vinylidene chloride, ethylene and propylene, ionomer polyethylene terephthalate, butyl rubber epichlorohydrin rubbers, ethylene/vinyl alcohol copolymer, ethylene/vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol terpolymer, and ethylene/vinyloxy ethanol copolymer.
  • Topical Administration The pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may be administered topically to the skin, orifices, or mucosa. The effects may be local or systemic. Topical administration, as described herein, includes, but is not limited to, conjuctival, intracorneal, intraocular, ophthalmic, auricular, transdermal, nasal (e.g., intranasal), vaginal, uretheral, respiratory, and rectal administration.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be formulated in any dosage form that is suitable for topical administration for local or systemic effect, including emulsions, solutions, suspensions, creams, gels, hydrogels, ointments, dusting powders, dressings, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes, foams, films, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, dermal patches.
  • the topical formulation of the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may contain the active ingredient(s) which may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle, and with any preservatives, buffers, absorption enhancers, propellants which may be required. Liposomes, micelles, microspheres, nanosystems, and mixtures thereof, may also be used.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles suitable for use in the topical formulations disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, aqueous vehicles, water-miscible vehicles, non-aqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents or preservatives against the growth of microorganisms, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, isotonic agents, buffering agents, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, wetting or emulsifying agents, complexing agents, sequestering or chelating agents, penetration enhancers, cryoprotectants, lyoprotectants, thickening agents, and inert gases.
  • aqueous vehicles water-miscible vehicles, non-aqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents or preservatives against the growth of microorganisms, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, isotonic agents, buffering agents, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersing agents, wetting or emulsifying agents, complexing agents, sequestering or
  • the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active ingredient(s), excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to an active ingredient(s), excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays such as those used for (intra)nasal administration, can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
  • Transdermal delivery devices e.g., patches
  • Such dosage forms have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of active ingredient(s) to the body. That is, the compounds of the present disclosure (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) can be administered via a transdermal patch at a steady state concentration, whereby the active ingredient(s) is gradually administered over time, thus avoiding drug spiking and adverse events/toxicity associated therewith.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof
  • the active ingredient(s) is gradually administered over time, thus avoiding drug spiking and adverse events/toxicity associated therewith.
  • Transdermal patch dosage forms herein may be formulated with various amounts of the active ingredient(s), depending on the disease/condition being treated, the active ingredient(s) employed, the permeation and size of the transdermal delivery device, the release time period, etc.
  • a unit dose preparation may be varied or adjusted e.g., from 5 mg, 10 mg, 15 mg, 20 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, 35 mg, 40 mg, 45 mg, 50 mg, to 200 mg, 175 mg, 150 mg, 125 mg, 100 mg, 95 mg, 90 mg, 85 mg, 80 mg, 75 mg, 70 mg, 65 mg, 60 mg, 55 mg of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) (active basis) or otherwise as deemed appropriate using sound medical judgment, according to the particular application and the potency of compound.
  • Transdermal patches formulated with the disclosed compounds may be suitable for microdosing or sub-psychedelic (also referred to herein as sub-psychoactive) dosing, to achieve durable therapeutic benefits, with decreased toxicity.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrag thereof is administered via a transdermal patch at sub-psychoactive (yet still potentially serotonergic) concentrations, for example, over an extended period such as over a 8, 24, 48, 72, 84, 96, or 168 hour time period.
  • the transdermal patch may also include one or more of a pressure sensitive adhesive layer, a backing, and a release liner, as is known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Transdermal patch dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the compounds herein in the proper medium .
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may be dissolved/dispersed directly into a polymer matrix forming the pressure sensitive adhesive layer.
  • Such transdermal patches are called drug-in-adhesive (DIA) patches.
  • DIA patch forms are those in which the active ingredient(s) is distributed uniformly throughout the pressure sensitive adhesive polymer matrix.
  • the active ingredient(s) may be provided in a layer containing the active ingredient(s) plus a polymer matrix which is separate from the pressure sensitive adhesive layer.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may optionally be formulated with suitable vehicles(s) such as carrier agents, permeation agents/absorption enhancers, humectants/crystallization inhibitors, etc. to increase the flux across the skin.
  • carrier agents may include, but are not limited to, C 8 -C 22 fatty acids, such as oleic acid, undecanoic acid, valeric acid, heptanoic acid, pelargonic acid, capric acid, lauric acid, and eicosapentaenoic acid; C 8 -C 22 fatty alcohols such as octanol, nonanol, oleyl alcohol, decyl alcohol and lauryl alcohol; lower alkyl esters of C 8 -C 22 fatty acids such as ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, butyl stearate, and methyl laurate; di(lower)alkyl esters of C 6 -C 22 diacids such as diisopropyl adipate; monoglycerides of C 8 -C 22 fatty acids such as glyceryl monolaurate; tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol polyethylene glycol ether; polyethylene glyco
  • permeation agents/absorption enhancers include, but are not limited to, sulfoxides, such as dodecylmethylsulfoxide, octyl methyl sulfoxide, nonyl methyl sulfoxide, decyl methyl sulfoxide, undecyl methyl sulfoxide, 2-hydroxydecyl methyl sulfoxide, 2- hydroxy-undecyl methyl sulfoxide, 2-hydroxydodecyl methyl sulfoxide, and the like; surfactant-lecithin organogel (PLO), such as those formed from an aqueous phase with one or more of poloxamers, CARBOPOL and PEMULEN, a lipid phase formed from one or more of isopropyl palmitate and PPG-2 myristyl ether propionate, and lecithin; fatty acids, esters, and alcohols, such as oleyloleate and oleyl alcohol; keto acids such
  • humectants/crystallization inhibitors include, but are not limited to, polyvinyl pyrrolidone-co-vinyl acetate, HPMC, polymethacrylate, and mixtures thereof.
  • the pressure sensitive adhesive layer may be formed from polymers including, but not limited to, acrylics (polyacrylates including alkyl acrylics), polyvinyl acetates, natural and synthetic rubbers (e.g., polyisobutylene), ethylenevinylacetate copolymers, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes, plasticized polyether block amide copolymers, plasticized styrene-butadiene rubber block copolymers, and mixtures thereof.
  • the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer used in the transdermal patch of the present disclosure may be formed from an acrylic polymer pressure-sensitive adhesive, preferably an acrylic copolymer pressure sensitive adhesive.
  • the acrylic copolymer pressure sensitive adhesive may be obtained by copolymerization of one or more alkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., 2-ethylhexyl acrylate); aryl (meth)acrylates; arylalkyl (meth)acrylate; and (meth)acrylates with functional groups such as hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates (e.g., hydroxyethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 3 -hydroxypropyl acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl methacrylate, 3 -hydroxypropyl methacrylate, and 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate), carboxylic acid containing (meth)acrylates (e.g., acrylic acid), and alkoxy (meth)acrylates (e.g., methoxyethyl acrylate); optionally with one or more copolymerizable monomers (e.g., vinyl
  • acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesives may include, but are not limited to, DURO-TAK products (Henkel) such as DURO-TAK 87- 900A, DURO-TAK 87-9301, DURO-TAK 87-4098, DURO-TAK 87-2074, DURO-TAK 87- 235 A, DURO-TAK 87-2510, DURO-TAK 87-2287, DURO-TAK 87-4287, DURO-TAK 87- 2516, DURO-TAK 387-2052, and DURO-TAK 87-2677.
  • DURO-TAK products Heenkel
  • DURO-TAK products such as DURO-TAK 87- 900A, DURO-TAK 87-9301, DURO-TAK 87-4098, DURO-TAK 87-2074, DURO-TAK 87- 235 A, DURO-TAK 87-2510, DURO-TA
  • the backing used in the transdermal patch of the present disclosure may include flexible backings such as films, nonwoven fabrics, Japanese papers, cotton fabrics, knitted fabrics, woven fabrics, and laminated composite bodies of a nonwoven fabric and a film.
  • Such a backing is preferably composed of a soft material that can be in close contact with a skin and can follow skin movement and of a material that can suppress skin rash and other discomforts following prolonged use of the patch.
  • the backing materials include, but are not limited to, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polystyrene, nylon, cotton, acetate rayon, rayon, a rayon/polyethylene terephthalate composite body, polyacrylonitrile, polyvinyl alcohol, acrylic polyurethane, ester polyurethane, ether polyurethane, a styrene-isoprene-styrene copolymer, a styrene-butadiene-styrene copolymer, a styrene-ethylene-propylene-styrene copolymer, styrene-butadiene rubber, an ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, or cellophane, for example.
  • the backing do not adsorb or release the active ingredient(s).
  • the backing preferably includes one or more layers composed of the material above and has a water vapor permeability.
  • Specific examples of backings may include, but are not limited to, 3M COTRAN products such as 3M COTRAN ethylene vinyl acetate membrane film 9702, 3M COTRAN ethylene vinyl acetate membrane film 9716, 3M COTRAN polyethylene membrane film 9720, 3M COTRAN ethylene vinyl acetate membrane film 9728, and the like.
  • the release liner used in the transdermal patch of the present disclosure may include, but is not limited to, a polyester film having one side or both sides treated with a release coating, a polyethylene laminated high-quality paper treated with a release coating, and a glassine paper treated with a release coating.
  • the release coating may be a fluoropolymer, a silicone, a fluorosilicone, or any other release coating known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the release liner may have an uneven surface in order to easily take out the transdermal patch from a package.
  • release liners may include, but are not limited to SCOTCHPAK products from 3M such as 3M SCOTCHPAK 9744, 3M SCOTCHPAK 9755, 3M SCOTCHPAK 9709, and 3M SCOTCHPAK 1022.
  • irritants e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate, poloxamer, sorbitan monoesters, glyceryl monooleates, spices, etc.
  • irritants e.g., sodium lauryl sulfate, poloxamer, sorbitan monoesters, glyceryl monooleates, spices, etc.
  • Methods disclosed herein using a transdermal patch dosage form provide for systemic delivery of small doses of active ingredient(s), preferably over extended periods of time such as up to 168 hour time periods, for example from 2 to 96 hours, or 4 to 72 hours, or 8 to 24 hours, or 10 to 18 hours, or 12 to 14 hours.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) can be delivered in small, steady, and consistent doses such that deleterious or undesirable side-effects can be avoided.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is administered transdermally at sub-psychoactive (yet still potentially serotonergic concentrations) concentrations.
  • An exemplary drug-in-adhesive (DIA) patch formulation may comprise 5 to 30 wt.% of a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, 30 to 70 wt.% pressure sensitive adhesive (e.g., DURO-TAK 387-2052, DURO-TAK 87-2677, and DURO-TAK 87-4098), 1 to 10 wt.% permeation agents/absorption enhancers (e.g., oleyloleate, oleyl alcohol, levulinic acid, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, etc.), and 5 to 35 wt.% crystallization inhibitor (e.g., polyvinyl pyrrolidone-co-vinyl acetate, HPMC, polymethacrylate, etc.), each based on a total weight of the DIA patch formulation, though it should be understood
  • Automatic injection devices offer a method for delivery of the compositions disclosed herein to patients.
  • the compositions disclosed herein may be administered to a patient using automatic injection devices through a number of known devices, a non-limiting list of which includes transdermal, subcutaneous, and intramuscular delivery.
  • a composition disclosed herein is absorbed through the skin.
  • Passive transdermal patch devices often include an absorbent layer or membrane that is placed on the outer layer of the skin. The membrane typically contains a dose of a substance that is allowed to be absorbed through the skin to deliver the composition to the patient.
  • only substances that are readily absorbed through the outer layer of the skin may be delivered with such transdermal patch devices.
  • Non-limiting examples of structures used to increase permeability to improve transfer of a composition into the skin, across the skin, or intramuscularly include the use of one or more microneedles, which in some embodiments may be coated with a composition disclosed herein. Alternatively, hollow microneedles may be used to provide a fluid channel for delivery of the disclosed compositions below the outer layer of the skin.
  • Other devices disclosed herein include transdermal delivery by iontophoresis, sonophoresis, reverse iontophoresis, or combinations thereof, and other technologies known in the art to increase skin permeability to facilitate drug delivery.
  • compositions may also be administered topically by electroporation, iontophoresis, phonophoresis, sonophoresis and microneedle or needle-free injection, such as POWDERJECTTM (Chiron Corp., Emeryville, Calif.), and BIOJECTTM (Bioject Medical Technologies Inc., Tualatin, Oreg.).
  • electroporation iontophoresis, phonophoresis, sonophoresis and microneedle or needle-free injection
  • BIOJECTTM Bioject Medical Technologies Inc., Tualatin, Oreg.
  • Suitable ointment vehicles include oleaginous or hydrocarbon vehicles, including such as lard, benzoinated lard, olive oil, cottonseed oil, and other oils, white petrolatum; emulsifiable or absorption vehicles, such as hydrophilic petrolatum, hydroxystearin sulfate, and anhydrous lanolin; water-removable vehicles, such as hydrophilic ointment; water-soluble ointment vehicles, including polyethylene glycols of varying molecular weight; emulsion vehicles, either water-in-oil (W/O) emulsions or oil-in-water (O/W) emulsions, including cetyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate, lanolin, and stearic acid (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra). These vehicles are emollient but generally require addition of antioxidant
  • Suitable cream base can be oil-in-water or water-in-oil.
  • Cream vehicles may be water- washable, and contain an oil phase, an emulsifier, and an aqueous phase.
  • the oil phase is also called the “internal” phase, which is generally comprised of petrolatum and a fatty alcohol such as cetyl or stearyl alcohol.
  • the aqueous phase usually, although not necessarily, exceeds the oil phase in volume, and generally contains a humectant.
  • the emulsifier in a cream formulation may be a nonionic, anionic, cationic, or amphoteric surfactant.
  • Gels are semisolid, suspension-type systems. Single-phase gels contain organic macromolecules distributed substantially uniformly throughout the liquid carrier. Suitable gelling agents include crosslinked acrylic acid polymers, such as carbomers, carboxypolyalkylenes, Carbopol®; hydrophilic polymers, such as polyethylene oxides, polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene copolymers, and polyvinylalcohol; cellulosic polymers, such as hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, and methylcellulose; gums, such as tragacanth and xanthan gum; sodium alginate; and gelatin.
  • dispersing agents such as alcohol or glycerin can be added, or the gelling agent can be dispersed by trituration, mechanical mixing, and/or stirring.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be administered rectally, urethrally, vaginally, or perivaginally in the forms of suppositories, pessaries, bougies, poultices or cataplasm, pastes, powders, dressings, creams, plasters, contraceptives, ointments, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, tampons, gels, foams, sprays, or enemas.
  • These dosage forms can be manufactured using conventional processes as described in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra.
  • Rectal, urethral, and vaginal suppositories are solid bodies for insertion into body orifices, which are solid at ordinary temperatures but melt or soften at body temperature to release the active ingredient(s) inside the orifices.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers utilized in rectal and vaginal suppositories include bases or vehicles, such as stiffening agents, which produce a melting point in the proximity of body temperature, when formulated with the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein; and antioxidants as described herein, including bisulfite and sodium metabisulfite.
  • Suitable vehicles include, but are not limited to, cocoa butter (theobroma oil), glycerin-gelatin, carbowax (polyoxyethylene glycol), spermaceti, paraffin, white and yellow wax, and appropriate mixtures of mono-, di- and triglycerides of fatty acids, hydrogels, such as polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxyethyl methacrylate, polyacrylic acid; glycerinated gelatin. Combinations of the various vehicles may be used. Rectal and vaginal suppositories may be prepared by the compressed method or molding. The typical weight of a rectal and vaginal suppository is about 2 to about 3 g.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein may be administered ophthalmically in the forms of solutions, suspensions, ointments, emulsions, gel-forming solutions, powders for solutions, gels, ocular inserts, and implants.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be administered intranasally.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be disclosed in the form of an aerosol or solution for delivery using a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, such as an atomizer using electrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist, or nebulizer, alone or in combination with a suitable propellant, including, but not limited to, fluorohydrocarbons, chlorofluorohydrocarbons, and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane, propane, 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane, and/or 1,1, 1,2, 3, 3, 3 -heptafluoropropane.
  • compositions may also be disclosed as a dry powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inert carrier such as lactose or phospholipids; and nasal drops.
  • the powder may comprise a bioadhesive agent, including chitosan or cyclodextrin.
  • Solutions or suspensions for use in a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, or nebulizer may be formulated to contain ethanol, aqueous ethanol, or a suitable alternative agent for dispersing, solubilizing, or extending release of the active ingredient disclosed herein, a propellant as solvent; and/or a surfactant, such as sorbitan trioleate, oleic acid, or an oligolactic acid.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be micronized to a size suitable for delivery, such as about 50 micrometers or less, or about 10 micrometers or less.
  • Particles of such sizes may be prepared using a comminuting method known to those skilled in the art, such as spiral jet milling, fluid bed jet milling, supercritical fluid processing to form nanoparticles, high pressure homogenization, or spray drying.
  • Capsules, blisters and cartridges for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated to contain a powder mix of the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein; a suitable powder base, such as lactose or starch; and a performance modifier, such as 1-leucine, mannitol, or magnesium stearate.
  • the lactose may be anhydrous or in the form of the monohydrate.
  • Other suitable excipients or carriers include dextran, glucose, maltose, sorbitol, xylitol, fructose, sucrose, and trehalose.
  • compositions disclosed herein for inhaled/intranasal administration may further comprise a suitable flavor, such as menthol and levomenthol, or sweeteners, such as saccharin or saccharin sodium.
  • suitable flavor such as menthol and levomenthol
  • sweeteners such as saccharin or saccharin sodium.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein for topical administration may be formulated to be immediate release or modified release, including delayed-, sustained-, pulsed- , controlled-, targeted, and programmed release.
  • modified release refers to a dosage form in which the rate or place of release of the active ingredient(s) is different from that of an immediate dosage form when administered by the same route.
  • modified release dosage forms can be prepared using a variety of modified release devices and methods known to those skilled in the art, including, but not limited to, matrix controlled release devices, osmotic controlled release devices, multiparticulate controlled release devices, ion-exchange resins, enteric coatings, multilayered coatings, microspheres, liposomes, and combinations thereof.
  • the release rate of the active ingredient(s) can also be modified by varying the particle sizes and polymorphism of the active ingredient(s).
  • compositions disclosed herein in a modified release dosage form may be fabricated using a matrix controlled release device known to those skilled in the art (see, Takada et al in “Encyclopedia of Controlled Drug Delivery,” Vol. 2, Mathiowitz ed., Wiley, 1999).
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein in a modified release dosage form is formulated using an erodible matrix device, which is water-swellable, erodible, or soluble polymers, including synthetic polymers, and naturally occurring polymers and derivatives, such as polysaccharides and proteins.
  • an erodible matrix device which is water-swellable, erodible, or soluble polymers, including synthetic polymers, and naturally occurring polymers and derivatives, such as polysaccharides and proteins.
  • Materials useful in forming an erodible matrix include, but are not limited to, chitin, chitosan, dextran, and pullulan; gum agar, gum arabic, gum karaya, locust bean gum, gum tragacanth, carrageenans, gum ghatti, guar gum, xanthan gum, and scleroglucan; starches, such as dextrin and maltodextrin; hydrophilic colloids, such as pectin; phosphatides, such as lecithin; alginates; propylene glycol alginate; gelatin; collagen; and cellulosics, such as ethyl cellulose (EC), methylethyl cellulose (MEC), carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC), CMEC, hydroxyethyl cellulose (HEC), hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC), cellulose acetate (CA), cellulose propionate (CP), cellulose butyrate (CB), cellulose a
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are formulated with a non- erodible matrix device.
  • the active ingredient(s) is dissolved or dispersed in an inert matrix and is released primarily by diffusion through the inert matrix once administered.
  • Materials suitable for use as a non-erodible matrix device included, but are not limited to, insoluble plastics, such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyisoprene, polyisobutylene, polybutadiene, polymethylmethacrylate, polybutylmethacrylate, chlorinated polyethylene, polyvinylchloride, methyl acrylate-methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethylene-vinylacetate copolymers, ethylene/propylene copolymers, ethylene/ethyl acrylate copolymers, vinylchloride copolymers with vinyl acetate, vinylidene chloride, ethylene and propylene, ionomer polyethylene terephthalate, butyl rubber epichlorohydrin rubbers,
  • the desired release kinetics can be controlled, for example, via the polymer type employed, the polymer viscosity, the particle sizes of the polymer and/or the active ingredient(s), the ratio of the active ingredients) versus the polymer, and other excipients or carriers in the compositions.
  • compositions disclosed herein in a modified release dosage form may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art, including direct compression, dry or wet granulation followed by compression, melt-granulation followed by compression.
  • compositions disclosed herein in a modified release dosage form may be fabricated using an osmotic controlled release device, including one-chamber system, two-chamber system, asymmetric membrane technology (AMT), and extruding core system (ECS).
  • osmotic controlled release device including one-chamber system, two-chamber system, asymmetric membrane technology (AMT), and extruding core system (ECS).
  • AMT asymmetric membrane technology
  • ECS extruding core system
  • such devices have at least two components: (a) the core which contains the active ingredient(s); and (b) a semipermeable membrane with at least one delivery port, which encapsulates the core.
  • the semipermeable membrane controls the influx of water to the core from an aqueous environment of use so as to cause drug release by extrusion through the delivery port(s).
  • the core of the osmotic device optionally includes an osmotic agent, which creates a driving force for transport of water from the environment of use into the core of the device.
  • osmotic agents water-swellable hydrophilic polymers, which are also referred to as “osmopolymers” and “hydrogels,” including, but not limited to, hydrophilic vinyl and acrylic polymers, polysaccharides such as calcium alginate, polyethylene oxide (PEO), polyethylene glycol (PEG), polypropylene glycol (PPG), poly(2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate), poly(acrylic) acid, poly(methacrylic) acid, polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), crosslinked PVP, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), PVA/PVP copolymers, PVA/PVP copolymers with hydrophobic monomers such as methyl methacrylate and vinyl acetate, hydrophilic polyurethanes containing large
  • the other class of osmotic agents are osmogens, which are capable of imbibing water to affect an osmotic pressure gradient across the barrier of the surrounding coating.
  • Suitable osmogens include, but are not limited to, inorganic salts, such as magnesium sulfate, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, sodium chloride, lithium chloride, potassium sulfate, potassium phosphates, sodium carbonate, sodium sulfite, lithium sulfate, potassium chloride, and sodium sulfate; sugars, such as dextrose, fructose, glucose, inositol, lactose, maltose, mannitol, raffinose, sorbitol, sucrose, trehalose, and xylitol, organic acids, such as ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, fumaric acid, citric acid, maleic acid, sebacic acid, sorbic acid, adipic acid, edetic acid
  • Osmotic agents of different dissolution rates may be employed to influence how rapidly the active ingredient(s) is initially delivered from the dosage form.
  • amorphous sugars such as Mannogeme EZ (SPI Pharma, Lewes, Del.) can be used to provide faster delivery during the first couple of hours to promptly produce the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release of the remaining amount to maintain the desired level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time.
  • the active ingredients) is released at such a rate to replace the amount of the active ingredient metabolized and excreted.
  • the core may also include a wide variety of other excipients and carriers as described herein to enhance the performance of the dosage form or to promote stability or processing.
  • Materials useful in forming the semipermeable membrane include various grades of acrylics, vinyls, ethers, polyamides, polyesters, and cellulosic derivatives that are water-permeable and water-insoluble at physiologically relevant pHs, or are susceptible to being rendered water-insoluble by chemical alteration, such as crosslinking.
  • Suitable polymers useful in forming the coating include plasticized, unplasticized, and reinforced cellulose acetate (CA), cellulose diacetate, cellulose triacetate, CA propionate, cellulose nitrate, cellulose acetate butyrate (CAB), CA ethyl carbamate, CAP, CA methyl carbamate, CA succinate, cellulose acetate trimellitate (CAT), CA dimethylaminoacetate, CA ethyl carbonate, CA chloroacetate, CA ethyl oxalate, CA methyl sulfonate, CA butyl sulfonate, CA p-toluene sulfonate, agar acetate, amylose triacetate, beta glucan acetate, beta glucan triacetate, acetaldehyde dimethyl acetate, triacetate of locust bean gum, hydroxylated ethylene-vinylacetate, EC, PEG, PPG, PEG/PPG copo
  • Semipermeable membrane may also be a hydrophobic microporous membrane, wherein the pores are substantially filled with a gas and are not weted by the aqueous medium but are permeable to water vapor, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,798,119.
  • Such hydrophobic but water- vapor permeable membrane are typically composed of hydrophobic polymers such as polyalkenes, polyethylene, polypropylene, polytetrafluoroethylene, polyacrylic acid derivatives, polyethers, polysulfones, polyethersulfones, polystyrenes, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylidene fluoride, polyvinyl esters and ethers, natural waxes, and synthetic waxes.
  • the delivery port(s) on the semipermeable membrane may be formed post-coating by mechanical or laser drilling. Delivery port(s) may also be formed in situ by erosion of a plug of water-soluble material or by rupture of a thinner portion of the membrane over an indentation in the core. In addition, delivery ports may be formed during coating process, as in the case of asymmetric membrane coatings of the type disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,612,059 and 5,698,220.
  • the total amount of the active ingredient(s) released and the release rate can substantially by modulated via the thickness and porosity of the semipermeable membrane, the composition of the core, and the number, size, and position of the delivery ports.
  • compositions in an osmotic controlled-release dosage form may further comprise additional conventional excipients or carriers as described herein to promote performance or processing of the composition.
  • the osmotic controlled-release dosage forms can be prepared according to conventional methods and techniques known to those skilled in the art (see, Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, supra; Santas and Baker, J. Controlled Release 1995, 35, 1-21; Verma et al., Drug Development and Industrial Pharmacy 2000, 26, 695-708; Verma et al., J. Controlled Release 2002, 79, 7-27).
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein are formulated as AMT controlled-release dosage forms, which comprises an asymmetric osmotic membrane that coats a core comprising the active ingredient(s) and other pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles (e.g., excipients or carriers).
  • AMT controlled-release dosage forms can be prepared according to conventional methods and techniques known to those skilled in the art, including direct compression, dry granulation, wet granulation, and a dip-coating method.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions disclosed herein are formulated as ESC controlled-release dosage form, which comprises an osmotic membrane that coats a core comprising the active ingredient(s), a hydroxylethyl cellulose, and other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers.
  • compositions disclosed herein in a modified release dosage form may be fabricated a multiparticulate controlled release device, which comprises a multiplicity of particles, granules, or pellets, ranging from about 10 pm to about 3 mm, about 50 m to about 2.5 mm, or from about 100 m to about 1 mm in diameter.
  • multiparticulates may be made by the processes know to those skilled in the art, including wet- and dry- granulation, extrusion/spheronization, roller-compaction, melt-congealing, and by spray- coating seed cores. See, for example, Multiparticulate Oral Drug Delivery', Marcel Dekker: 1994; and Pharmaceutical Pelletization Technology, Marcel Dekker: 1989.
  • excipients or carriers as described herein may be blended with the pharmaceutical compositions to aid in processing and forming the multiparticulates.
  • the resulting particles may themselves constitute the multiparticulate device or may be coated by various film- forming materials, such as enteric polymers, water-swellable, and water-soluble polymers.
  • the multiparticulates can be further processed as a capsule or a tablet.
  • compositions disclosed herein may also be formulated to be targeted to a particular tissue, receptor, or other area of the body of the subject to be treated, including liposome-, resealed erythrocyte-, and antibody-based delivery systems.
  • compositions disclosed herein may be formulated for inhalation administration, e.g., for pulmonary absorption.
  • suitable preparations may include liquid form preparations such as those described above, e.g., solutions and emulsions, wherein the solvent or carrier is, for example, water, water/ water-miscible vehicles such as water/propylene glycol solutions, or organic solvents, with optional buffering agents, which can be delivered as an aerosol, preferably a mist, with a carrier gas, such as air, oxygen, a mixture of helium and oxygen, or other gases and gas mixtures.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as a dry powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inert carrier such as lactose or phospholipids.
  • compositions may be in the form of an aerosol or solution for delivery using a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, such as an atomizer using electrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist, or nebulizer, alone or in combination with a suitable propellant, such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, a hydro fluoroalkane such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA 134A) and 1,1,1,2,3,3,3-heptafluoropropane (HFA 227), carbon dioxide, perfluorinated hydrocarbons such as perflubron, and other suitable gases.
  • a suitable propellant such as dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, a hydro fluoroalkane such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA
  • Aqueous solutions suitable for inhalation use can be prepared by dissolving the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, in water or other water-based medium. Suitable stabilizers and thickening agents can also be added.
  • Emulsions suitable for inhalation use can be made by solubilizing the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, in an aqueous medium and dispersing the solubilized form in a hydrophobic medium, optionally with viscous material, such as natural or synthetic gums, resins, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and other suspending agents.
  • viscous material such as natural or synthetic gums, resins, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and other suspending agents.
  • Solutions or suspensions for use in a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, or nebulizer may be formulated to contain a surfactant or other appropriate co-solvent, or a suitable alternative agent for dispersing, solubilizing, or extending release of the active ingredient disclosed herein, and optionally a propellant.
  • a surfactant or other appropriate co-solvent may include, but are not limited to, Polysorbate 20, 60, and 80; Pluronic F-68, F-84, and P-103; cyclodextrin; polyoxyl 35 castor oil; sorbitan trioleate, oleic acid, or an oligolactic acid.
  • Surfactants and co-solvents may be optionally employed at a level between about 0.01 % and about 2% by weight of the pharmaceutical composition. Viscosity greater than that of simple aqueous solutions may be desirable in some cases to decrease variability in dispensing the formulations, to decrease physical separation of components of an emulsion of formulation, and/or otherwise to improve the formulation.
  • Such viscosity building agents include, for example, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, hydroxy propyl methylcellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxy propyl cellulose, chondroitin sulfate and salts thereof, hyaluronic acid and salts thereof, and combinations of the foregoing. Such agents, when desirable, are typically employed at a level between about 0.01% and about 2% by weight of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • Organic solvents can be, for example, acetonitrile, chlorobenzene, chloroform, cyclohexane, 1,2-dichloromethane, dichloromethane, 1,2- dimethoxyethane, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, 1,4-dioxane, 2- ethoxyethanol, ethylene glycol, formamide, hexane, methanol, ethanol, 2-methoxyethanol, methybutylketone, methylcyclohexane, N-methylpyrrolidone, nitromethane, pyridine, sulfolane, tetralin, toluene, 1,1,2-trichloroethylene, or xylene, and like, including combinations thereof.
  • Organic solvents can belong to functional group categories such as ester solvents, ketone solvents, alcohol solvents, and like, including combinations thereof.
  • Organic solvents can belong to functional group categories such as ester solvents
  • the compounds of the present disclosure can be delivered as an aerosol, preferably a mist, via inhalation, for systemic administration to the patient’s central nervous system.
  • the aerosol is generated without externally added heat (this does not exclude minor temperature increases caused by the formation of the aerosol itself, such as with a vibrating mesh or other nebulizer. However, such minor temperature increases can often be offset by vaporization of the drug, which results in cooling of the composition).
  • the compounds of the present disclosure can be delivered as an aerosol, preferably a mist, with a carrier, such as air, oxygen, or a mixture of helium and oxygen, or other gas mixtures including therapeutic gas mixtures.
  • the carrier gas e.g., air, oxygen, a mixture of helium and oxygen, or other gases and gas mixtures
  • the carrier gas can be heated to about 50°C to about 60°C, or to about 55°C to about 56°C.
  • the helium can be present in the mixture of oxygen and helium at about 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90% by volume, and the oxygen can be present in the mixture at about 50%, 40%, 30%, or 10% by volume, or any range therebetween.
  • Inhalation delivery can further comprise administering a pretreatment inhalation therapy prior to administration of the aerosol comprising the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the pretreatment can comprise administering via inhalation of a mixture of helium and oxygen heated to about 90°C, to about 92°C, to about 94°C, to about 96°C, to about 98°C, to about 100°C, to about 105°C, to about 110°C, to about 115°C, to about 120°C, or any range therebetween, to the patient.
  • an inhalation procedure may involve (i) administering via inhalation a mixture of helium and oxygen heated to about 90°C to about 120°C to the patient, followed by (ii) administering via inhalation a mixture of helium and oxygen heated to about 50°C to about 60°C and the aerosol comprising the compound of Formula (I) through (V) to the patient and then repeating steps (i) and (ii). Steps (i) and (ii) can be repeated 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more times.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure can, in some embodiments, be administered via aerosol inhalation at doses of about 1 ⁇ g to about 200 mg or more (or any range between about 1 ⁇ g to about 200 mg), e.g., about 1 ⁇ g, 2 ⁇ g, 5 ⁇ g, 6 ⁇ g, 10 ⁇ g, 13 ⁇ g, 15 ⁇ g, 20 ⁇ g, 30 ⁇ g, 40 ⁇ g, 50 ⁇ g, 60 ⁇ g, 70 ⁇ g, 80 ⁇ g, 90 ⁇ g, 100 ⁇ g, 110 ⁇ g, 120 ⁇ g, 130 ⁇ g, 140 ⁇ g, 150 ⁇ g, 160 ⁇ g, 170 ⁇ g, 180 ⁇ g, 190 ⁇ g, 200 ⁇ g, 210 ⁇ g, 220 ⁇ g, 230 ⁇ g, 240 ⁇ g, 250 ⁇ g, 260 ⁇ g, 270 ⁇ g, 280 ⁇ g,
  • a subject can have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or more inhalation sessions a day. In some embodiments, a subject can have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or more inhalation sessions every other day, once a week, twice a week, or three times a week. In some embodiments, a subject can have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or more inhalation sessions every other month, twice a month, three times a month, or four times a month. In some embodiments, a subject can have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or more inhalation sessions pL er treatment course, such as within a 28 -day time period.
  • An aerosol preferably a mist
  • the carrier gas can be delivered at room temperature or heated.
  • an aerosol, preferably a mist comprising a compound of Formula (I) through (V) is delivered via inhalation using heated helium-oxygen (HELIOX) mixtures. Due to very low viscosity of helium the helium-oxygen mixtures generate gaseous streams characterized by laminar flow that is a highly desirable feature for reaching out into the deep lung areas and reducing deposition of the drug in the respiratory tract, one of the major obstacles in dose delivery via inhalation.
  • HELIOX heated helium-oxygen
  • a patient can inhale a dissolved compound disclosed herein as a mist into an alveolar region of the patient's lungs.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) can then be delivered to a fluid lining of the alveolar region of the lungs and can be systemically absorbed into patient blood circulation.
  • these formulations can be effectively delivered to the blood stream upon inhalation to the alveolar regions of the lungs.
  • a foil delivery setup can be a device as described in, for example, Russian patent RU199823U1.
  • heliox refers to breathing gas mixtures of helium gas (He) and oxygen gas (O 2 ).
  • the heliox mixture can contain helium in the mixture of helium and oxygen at about 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90% by volume, and contain oxygen in the mixture of helium and oxygen at about 50%, 40%, 30%, or 10% by volume, or any range therebetween.
  • the heliox mixture can thus contain helium and oxygen in a volume ratio of 50:50, 60:40, 70:30, 80:20, 90:10, or any range therebetween.
  • heliox can generate less airway resistance through increased tendency to laminar flow and reduced resistance in turbulent flow.
  • the use of heat in heliox mixtures can further enhance drag delivery by increasing permeability of key physical barriers for drug absorption. Heating of mucosal surfaces can increase permeability by enhancing peripheral blood circulation and relaxing the interstitial junction, as well as other mechanisms. Helium has a thermal conductivity almost 10 times higher than oxygen and nitrogen and can facilitate heat transfer more efficiently.
  • a dry heliox mixture can be used safely as a pretreatment step when warmed up to as high as 110°C, which can enable the dry heliox mixture to heat mucosal surfaces of the lung and respiratory tract more efficiently.
  • Vaporizers are characterized by heating a solid drug or compound. Vaporizers can work by directly heating a solid drug or compound to a smoldering point. Vaporizing a solid or solid concentrate can be done by convection or conduction. Convection heating of solid concentrate involves a heating element coming into contact with water, or another liquid, which then vaporizes. The hot vapor in turn directly heats the solid or solid concentrate to a smoldering point, releasing a vapor to be inhaled by a user.
  • Conduction heating involves direct contact between the solid or solid concentrate and the heating element, which brings the solid to a smoldering point, releasing vapor to be inhaled by a user.
  • vaporizers present advantages over smoking in terms of lung damage, the drug/active ingredient that is vaporized can be substantially deteriorated by the vaporizing heat.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is delivered via a nebulizer, which generates an aqueous-droplet aerosol, preferably a mist, containing the compound, which is optionally combined with a heated helium-oxygen mixture.
  • the disclosed compounds are delivered via a nebulizer, which generates an aqueous-droplet aerosol, preferably a mist, containing the compound, which is combined with a driving gas comprising nitrous oxide.
  • the driving gas comprising nitrous oxide may be nitrous oxide gas itself or a therapeutic gas mixture, such as a N 2 O-O 2 mixture or a N 2 O-air mixture.
  • the therapeutic gas mixture may further include other gases such as one or more of N 2 , Ar, CO 2 , Ne, CH 4 , He, Kr, H 2 , Xe, H 2 O (e.g., vapor), etc.
  • the driving gas is a therapeutic gas mixture comprising N 2 O, which is present at a concentration ranging from 5 vol%, from 10 vol%, from 15 vol%, from 20 vol%, from 25 vol%, from 30 vol%, from 35 vol%, from 40 vol%, from 45 vol%, and up to 75 vol%, up to 70 vol%, up to 65 vol%, up to 60 vol%, up to 55 vol%, up to 50 vol%, relative to a total volume of the therapeutic gas mixture, or any range in between.
  • nitrous oxide being an NMD A receptor antagonist
  • the driving gas can augment the effect of the disclosed compounds and provide the ability to use lower doses thereof to obtain similar levels of effect.
  • a preparation of compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof can be placed into a liquid medium and put into an aerosol by a device, such as a nebulizer.
  • a nebulizer can be, for example, a pneumatic compressor nebulizer, an ultrasonic nebulizer, a vibrating mesh or horn nebulizer, or a microprocessor- controlled breath-actuated nebulizer.
  • a nebulizer device can be a device as described in, for example, Russian patent RU199823U1.
  • a nebulizer is a device that turns a drug, such as a compound of Formula (I) through (V), in solution or suspension into a fine aerosol, such as a mist, for delivery to the lungs.
  • a nebulizer can also be referred to as an atomizer.
  • To atomize is to put a dissolved drug into an aerosol, such as a mist, form.
  • a drug can be dispersed in a liquid medium, for example, water, ethanol, or propylene glycol.
  • the disclosed compounds can be carried in a vehicle such as, for example liposomes, polymers, emulsions, micelles, nanoparticles, or polyethylenimine (PEI).
  • Liquid drug formations for nebulizers can be, for example, aqueous solutions or viscous solutions.
  • a dispersing forcer e.g., jet of gas, ultrasonic waves, or vibration of mesh
  • the dissolved drug is contained within liquid droplets, which are then inhaled.
  • a mist can contain liquid droplets containing the drug in air or another gaseous mixture (e.g., a mixture of helium and oxygen).
  • Jet nebulizers use compressed gas to make a mist.
  • a jet nebulizer is a microprocessor- controlled breath-actuated nebulizer, also called a breath-actuated nebulizer.
  • a breath-actuated nebulizer creates a mist only when a patient is inhaling, rather than creating a mist continuously.
  • a mist can be generated by, for example, passing air flow through a Venturi in a nebulizer bowl or cup.
  • a Venturi is a system for speeding the flow of a fluid by constricting fluid in a cone shape tube.
  • the fluid In the restriction, the fluid must increase its velocity, thereby reducing its pressure and producing a partial vacuum. As the fluid exits the constriction point, its pressure increases back to the ambient or pipe level pressure. This can form a low-pressure zone that pulls up droplets through a feed tube from a solution of drug in a nebulizer bowl, and in turn this creates a stream of atomized droplets, which flow to a mouthpiece. Higher air flows lead to a decrease in particle size and an increase in output. Due to droplets and solvent that saturates the outgoing gas, jet nebulizers can cool a drug solution in the nebulizer and increase solute concentration in the residual volume.
  • a baffle in a nebulizer bowl or cup can be impacted by larger particles, retaining them and returning them to the solution in the nebulizer bowl or cup to be reatomized.
  • Entrainment of air through a nebulizer bowl as the subject inhales can increase mist output during inspiration. Generation of a mist can occur with a smaller particle size distribution, but using smaller particle sizes can result in an increased nebulization time.
  • the unit of measurement generally used for droplet size is mass median diameter (MMD), which is defined as the average droplet diameter by mass. This unit can also be referred to as the mass mean aerodynamic diameter, or MMAD.
  • MMD droplet size for jet nebulizers can be about 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 pm or more (or any range between about 1.0 and 10.0 pm), which can be smaller than that of ultrasonic nebulizers.
  • Ultrasonic nebulizers generate mists by using the vibration of a piezoelectric crystal, which converts alternating current to high-frequency (about 1 to about 3 MHz) acoustic energy.
  • the solution breaks up into droplets at the surface, and the resulting mist is drawn out of the device by the patient's inhalation or pushed out by gas flow through the device generated by a small compressor.
  • Ultrasonic nebulizers can include large-volume ultrasonic nebulizers and small-volume ultrasonic nebulizers. Droplet sizes tend to be larger with ultrasonic nebulizers than with jet nebulizers.
  • the MMD droplet size for ultrasonic nebulizers can be about 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 7.0, 7.5, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 pm or more (or any range between about 2.0 and 10.0 pm).
  • Ultrasonic nebulizers can create a dense mist, with droplets at about 100, 150, 200, 250, 300 pm/L or more.
  • Mesh nebulizer devices use the vibration of a piezoelectric crystal to indirectly generate a mist.
  • Mesh nebulizers include, for example, active mesh nebulizers and passive mesh nebulizers.
  • Active mesh nebulizers use a piezo element that contracts and expands on application of an electric current and vibrates a precisely drilled mesh in contact with the drug solution to generate a mist.
  • the vibration of a piezoelectric crystal can be used to vibrate a thin metal plate perforated by several thousand holes. One side of the plate is in contact with the liquid to be atomized, and the vibration forces this liquid through the holes, generating a mist of tiny droplets.
  • Passive mesh nebulizers use a transducer horn that induces passive vibrations in the perforated plate with tapered holes to produce a mist.
  • active mesh nebulizers include the Aeroneb® (Aerogen, Galway, Ireland) and the eFlow® (PARI, Starnberg, Germany), while the Microair NE-U22® (Omron, Bannockburn, IL) is a passive mesh nebulizer.
  • Mesh nebulizers are precise and customizable. By altering the pore size of the mesh, the device can be tailored for use with drug solutions of different viscosities, and the output rate changed. Use of this method of atomization can offer several advantages.
  • the size of the droplets can be extremely precise because droplet size can be determined by the size of the holes in the mesh (which may be tailor-made to suit the application).
  • Nebulizer meshes can be manufactured using methods such as electrodeposition, electroplating, and laser cutting to produce a liquid particle in gas in the respirable range.
  • Mesh can be made of metal alloy. The metals used in mesh manufacture can include platinum, palladium, nickel, and stainless steel.
  • the size of the droplet is about twice the size of the mesh hole. Mesh holes, therefore, can be about 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0 pm or more (or any value in between about 0.1 and 5.0 pm).
  • Mist generation in mesh nebulizers can vary based on the shape of the mesh, the material that the mesh is made of, and also the way that the mesh is created. In other words, different meshes can produce different sized liquid particles suspended in gas.
  • MMD droplet size for mesh nebulizers can be about 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 5.5., 6.0, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 7.0pm or more '(or any value in between about 1.0 and 7.0pm).
  • droplet size can be programmable. In particular, geometric changes can be made to a nebulizer to provide a specific desired droplet size. Additionally, droplet size can be controlled independently of droplet velocity. The volume of liquid atomized, and the droplet velocity can also be precisely controlled by adjusting the frequency and amplitude of the mesh vibration. Furthermore, the number of holes in the mesh and their layout on the mesh can be tailored. Mesh nebulizers can be powered either by electricity or by battery.
  • a mist output rate in standing cloud mL per minute can range from, for example, 0.1, 0.2. 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 mL/minute or more (or any range between about 0.1 and 0.9 mL/minute) and the residual volume in any type of nebulizer reservoir can range from a about 0.01, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0 mL or more (or any range between about 0.01 and 2.0 mL).
  • Precise droplet size control can be advantageous since droplet size can correlate directly to kinetic drug release (KDR). Precise control of KDR can be achievable with precise control of droplet size.
  • the compounds herein can be delivered via a mist using any methodology with an MMD droplet size of about 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 pm or more (or any range between about 0.5 and 10.0 pm).
  • a compound of Formula (I) through (V) can be delivered via a continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP) or other pressure-assisted breathing device.
  • CPAP continuous positive airway pressure
  • a pressure-assisted breathing device forces a continuous column of compressed air or other gas at a fixed designated pressure against the face and nose of the patient, who is wearing a mask or nasal cap.
  • the pressure is transmitted throughout the airway, helping to open it.
  • pressure from the deflating lungs and chest wall pushes air out against the continuous pressure, until the two pressures are equal.
  • a pressure-assisted breathing device can be coupled with a means for introducing mist particles into the gas flow in the respiratory circuit and or a means for discontinuing the introduction of mist particles into the respiratory circuit when the patient exhales. See, e.g. US Pat. No. 7,267,121.
  • a mist can be delivered by a device such as a metered dose inhaler (MDI) (also referred to as a pressurized metered dose inhaler or pMDI), which generates an organic solvent-droplet mist containing a compound of Formula (I) through (V), which is optionally combined with a heated helium-oxygen mixture.
  • MDI metered dose inhaler
  • pMDI pressurized metered dose inhaler
  • the compound can be delivered via a metered dose inhaler, MDI.
  • MDI devices can include a canister which contains the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and a propellant, a metering valve which dispenses the medicament from the canister, an actuator body that receives the canister and which forms an opening for oral inhalation, and an actuator stem which receives the drug from the canister and directs it out the opening in the actuator body.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof can be dissolved in a liquid propellant mixture (sometimes including small amounts of a volatile organic solvent) stored in a pressurized container of the MDI.
  • a liquid propellant mixture sometimes including small amounts of a volatile organic solvent
  • the “metered dose” is the dose that is prepackaged in a single-dose inhaler, or which in a multidose inhaler is automatically measured out of a reservoir in preparation for inhalation.
  • MDI devices can be aided with spacers.
  • An MDI spacer is a spacer that goes between the MDI and the mouth of a user of the MDI.
  • An MDI spacer allows droplets in the atomized dose to settle out a bit and mix with air or other gas, thus allowing for more effective delivery of a metered dose into a user's lungs when inhaled.
  • An MDI spacer assists in preventing a user from inhaling the metered dose directly from an MDI where the dose would be traveling so fast that the droplets of the atomized spray from the MDI hit and stick to the back of the user's throat rather than being inhaled into the user's lungs where the drug of the metered dose is designed to be delivered.
  • MDI devices offer the advantage of regular dosing, which can be controlled in the manufacture of the drug.
  • Drugs can also be delivered by dry powder inhalers (DPI).
  • DPI devices the drug itself can form the powder or the powder can be formed from a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier and the drug is releasably bound to a surface of the carrier powder such that upon inhalation, the moisture in the lungs releases the drug from the surface to make the drug available for systemic absorption.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof is delivered by use of a dry powder inhaler (DPI).
  • the drug can be formed into the necessary powder itself, or can be releasably bound to a surface of a carrier powder.
  • carrier powders are known in the art (see, e.g., H. Hamishehkar, et al., “The Role of Carrier in Dry Powder Inhaler”, Recent Advances in Novel Drug Carrier Systems, 2012, pp.39-66).
  • DPI is generally formulated as a powder mixture of coarse carrier particles and micronized drug particles with aerodynamic particle diameters of 1-5 pm (see e.g., lida, Kotaro, et al. “Preparation of dry powder inhalation by surface treatment of lactose carrier particles” Chemical and pharmaceutical bulletin 51.1 (2003): 1-5).
  • Carrier particles are often used to improve drug particle flowability, thus improving dosing accuracy and minimizing the dose variability observed with drug formulations alone while making them easier to handle during manufacturing operations.
  • Carrier particles should have several characteristics such as physico-chemical stability, biocompatibility and biodegradability, compatible with the drug substance and must be inert, available and economical.
  • carrier particle both content and size
  • carrier particle are made of lactose or other sugars, with a-lactose monohydrate being the most common lactose grade used in the inhalation field for such particulate carriers.
  • Systemic delivery of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) can be carried out via inhalation of an aerosol comprising the compound and a carrier gas such as air, oxygen, helium, a mixture of helium and oxygen (i.e., a heliox mixture), other gases or other gas mixtures.
  • a carrier gas such as air, oxygen, helium, a mixture of helium and oxygen (i.e., a heliox mixture), other gases or other gas mixtures.
  • the carrier gas can be heated.
  • the method can further comprise using a device containing a balloon with an oxygen-helium mixture equipped with a reducer and a mask connected to each other by a gas or air connecting tube, which contains an additional heating element capable of heating the gas mixture up to 120 °C, a nebulizer with a vibrating porous plate or mesh, ensuring the passage of droplets with a size of less than 5 microns through it, and a disinfection unit.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is delivered to the lower respiratory tract, for instance, to a pulmonary compartment such as alveoli, alveolar ducts and/or bronchioles. From there, the drug can enter the blood stream and travel to the central nervous system.
  • inhalation of a mist can deliver the compound of Formula (I) through (V) to the patient’s CNS without passing through the liver. Administration via inhalation can allow gaseous drugs or those dispersed in a liquid or a mist, to rapidly reach the blood stream, bypassing first-pass metabolism.
  • First-pass metabolism also known as “first- pass effect” or “presystemic metabolism” describes drugs that enter the liver and undergo extensive biotransformation.
  • the present disclosure provides a treatment step, in which the compound of Formula (I) through (V) can be administered to a patient in need thereof by administering via inhalation a mixture of helium and oxygen heated to about 50°C, 51 °C, 52°C, 53°C, 54°C, 55°C, 56°C, 57°C, 58°C, 59°C, 60°C, or more (or any range between 50°C to 60°C) and the atomized compound.
  • a mist or vapor of the compound can have a particle size from about 0.1 microns to about 10 microns (e.g., about 10, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 0.1 or less microns).
  • atomization is performed via a nebulizer creating an inhalant that is a mist.
  • the atomized compound is driven down the patient delivery line by the patient’s inhalation.
  • the atomized compound is driven down the patient delivery line by the patient’s inhalation using a carrier gas.
  • the carrier gas can be air, oxygen, a mix of oxygen and helium, heated air, heated oxygen, a heated helium and oxygen mixture, among others.
  • the treatment step can be preceded by a pretreatment step.
  • the pretreatment step can comprise first administering a pretreatment inhalation therapy prior to administration of the mist of the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • the pretreatment inhalation step can comprise (i) administering via inhalation air, oxygen, or mixture of helium and oxygen heated to about 90°C, 91 °C, 92°C, 93°C, 94°C, 95°C, 96°C, 97°C, 98°C, 99°C, 100°C, 101°C, 102°C, 103°C, 104°C, 105°C, 106°C, 107°C, 108°C, 109°C, 110°C, 111°C, 112°C, 113°C, 114°C, U5°C, 116°C, 117°C, 118°C, 119°C, 120°C, or more (or any range between about
  • Heated air, heated oxygen, or heated helium and oxygen mixture, in combination with the atomized compound of the present disclosure, can be heated to about 50°C, 51°C, 52°C, 53°C, 54°C, 55°C, 56°C, 57°C, 58°C, 59°C, 60°C, or more (or any range between about 50°C and 60°C).
  • a pretreatment step (i) and a treatment step (ii) can be repeated 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more times.
  • steps (i) and (ii) can be repeated 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more times followed by the treatment step, which can be repeated 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more times.
  • the treatment step can be repeated 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more times with no pretreatment step.
  • Treatment can be administered once a week, twice a week, once a day, twice a day, three times a day or more, a defined number of treatments per treatment course (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 treatments per treatment course) or other treatment schedules as set forth herein.
  • a defined number of treatments per treatment course e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 treatments per treatment course
  • a drug delivery procedure can comprise an inhaled priming no-drug hot heliox mixture to effectively preheat the mucosal bed followed by inhaling an atomized compound of the present disclosure, again driven by the heated heliox, but at lower temperatures, that are now dictated by lower heat tolerance to the wet vs. dry inhaled gas stream. Consequently, this procedure can be conducted in multiple repeated cycles, wherein a target PK and drug exposure is controlled by the concentration of the drug, temperature, flow rate of the helium oxygen mixture, composition of the mixture, number and durations of cycles, time and combinations of the above.
  • combination drug therapies based on administration of both a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, (as a 5-HT 2A receptor agonist) and a N- methyl-D-aspartate (NMD A) receptor antagonist.
  • the combination drug therapy may enhance activity and improve patient experience when treating diseases or disorders associated with 5- HT 2A and/or NMD A receptors (e.g., a neuropsychiatric disease or disorder, a central nervous system (CNS) disorder, a psychological disorder, etc.), for example, by providing therapeutic efficacy while reducing or eliminating psychiatric adverse effects such as acute psychedelic crisis (bad trip) and dissociative effects from hallucinogens (out of body experience).
  • diseases or disorders associated with 5- HT 2A and/or NMD A receptors e.g., a neuropsychiatric disease or disorder, a central nervous system (CNS) disorder, a psychological disorder, etc.
  • Non-limiting examples of NMD A receptor antagonists include, but are not limited to, ketamine, nitrous oxide, memantine, amantadine, dextromethorphan (DXM), phencyclidine (PCP), methoxetamine (MXE), dizocilpine (MK-801), esmethadone, or a combination thereof.
  • nitrous oxide N 2 O
  • laughing gas is a rapid and effective analgesic gas that has a fast onset and rarely produces side effects when administered under proper medical supervision.
  • Nitrous oxide is also a dissociative inhalant known to cause euphoria during inhalation.
  • nitrous oxide Prominent effects of nitrous oxide are increased feelings of euphoria, a heightened pain threshold, and involuntary laughing. Furthermore, unlike ketamine, nitrous oxide is not addictive. For these reasons, the use of nitrous oxide as the NMDA receptor antagonist is preferred.
  • the combination drug therapy involves providing the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, and the NMDA receptor antagonist as a single dosage form for administration to a patient (e.g., each is combined to provide a single aerosol that is inhaled by the patient; or each is combined into a single transdermal patch and delivered transdermally or subcutaneously to the patient).
  • the NMDA receptor antagonist is nitrous oxide
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof may be present in the liquid phase of the aerosol, while the nitrous oxide may be present in the gas phase of the aerosol.
  • the nitrous oxide (or therapeutic gas mixture comprising nitrous oxide) may be used in the generation of the aerosol or as a carrier gas used to deliver a generated aerosol to the patient.
  • the carrier gas becomes a part of the gas phase of the aerosol, i.e., the liquid phase of the aerosol becomes entrained in/diluted by the carrier gas.
  • the combination drug therapy involves providing the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, and the NMDA receptor antagonist as separate dosage forms.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof may be provided as an aerosol, preferably a mist, while the NMD A receptor antagonist is provided separately as a therapeutic gas mixture.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof may be provided as an injectable (e.g., intravenous, intradermal, etc.), bolus, infusion, perfusion, etc., while the NMDA receptor antagonist is provided as a therapeutic gas mixture for inhalation delivery.
  • an injectable e.g., intravenous, intradermal, etc.
  • bolus e.g., infusion, perfusion, etc.
  • the NMDA receptor antagonist is provided as a therapeutic gas mixture for inhalation delivery.
  • the co-action of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) (as a 5-HT 2A receptor agonist) and a NMDA receptor antagonist (e.g., nitrous oxide, ketamine, etc.) may provide multiple benefits.
  • the NMDA receptor antagonist may control and/or reduce the activating effects of the 5-HT 2 Rs, thereby reducing the risk of overstimulation and occurrences of psychiatric adverse effects such as acute psychedelic crisis.
  • administration of the NMDA receptor antagonist may enable the use of a reduced therapeutic dose of the compound of Formula (I) through (V), thereby decreasing the likelihood of a negative patient experience or dose-dependent side effects.
  • administration of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) may reduce the amount of NMDA receptor antagonist necessary for a therapeutic effect, which in the case of NMDA receptor antagonists such as nitrous oxide may alleviate certain side effects such as induced involuntary laughter and the general feelings of anxiety associated therewith.
  • NMDA receptor antagonists such as nitrous oxide may alleviate certain side effects such as induced involuntary laughter and the general feelings of anxiety associated therewith.
  • co-administration would reduce the likelihood of a negative experience from the psychedelic administration, either because less psychedelic would be administered or the NMDA receptor antagonist (e.g., nitrous oxide, ketamine, etc.) would enable more efficient functioning of the psychedelic.
  • co- administration would reduce the time or amount of NMDA receptor antagonist (e.g., nitrous oxide, ketamine, etc.) necessary for a therapeutic effect.
  • NMDA receptor antagonists e.g., nitrous oxide
  • 5-HT 2A receptor agonists function via different pharmacological pathways.
  • both pathways appear to ultimately converge in a cascade at mTOR (mammalian target of rapamycin, or mechanistic target of rapamycin).
  • mTOR mimalian target of rapamycin, or mechanistic target of rapamycin.
  • mTOR mimalian target of rapamycin
  • 5-HT 2A receptor agonists e.g., 5-HT 2A receptor agonists.
  • mTOR signaling pathway may be modulated by 5-HT 2A receptor activation and NMDA antagonism.
  • modulation of the mTOR pathway may underpin the immediate and long-lasting therapeutic and synergistic benefits of combined administration of both agents.
  • administration of both agents at psychedelic or sub-psychedelic doses enables therapeutic efficacy without or minimizing psychiatric adverse effects.
  • PFC prefrontal cortex
  • a ratio of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and the NMD A receptor antagonist administered in the combination drug therapy may vary depending on the patient (i.e. , subject), the identity of the active ingredient(s) selections of the combination, the dosage form(s), and the specific disease or condition being treated. It should be understood that a specific ratio of the combination for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, such as the activity of the specific compounds employed, the age, sex, general health of the patient, time of administration, rate of excretion, and the severity of the particular disease or condition being treated.
  • a weight ratio of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and the NMD A receptor antagonist administered to the patient may range from about 1 : 100 to about 100:1, or any range therebetween, e.g., from about 1 :75, from about 1:50, from about 1 :40, from about 1:30, from about 1 :20, from about 1 :10, from about 1 :8, from about 1 :6, from about 1 :5, from about 1:4, from about 1:3, from about 1:2, from about 2:3, from about 1:1, and up to about 100:1, up to about 75:1, up to about 50:1, up to about 40:1, up to about 30:1, up to about 20:1, up to about 10:1, up to about 8:1, up to about 6:1, up to about 5:1, up to about 4:1, up to about 3:1, up to about 2:1. Ratios outside of this range may also be employed, in certain circumstances.
  • the combination drug therapy is intended to embrace administration of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and the NMDA receptor antagonist (e.g., nitrous oxide) in a sequential manner, that is, wherein each active ingredient is administered at a different time, as well as administration of these active ingredients, or at least two of the active ingredients, in a concurrent manner.
  • Concurrent administration can be accomplished, for example, by administering to the subject a single dosage form having a fixed ratio of each active ingredient or in multiple, single dosage forms for each of the active ingredients.
  • Administration of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and a NMD A receptor antagonist (e.g., nitrous oxide), whether in a single dosage form or separate dosage forms, can be carried out by any administration route set forth herein.
  • both the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and the NMDA receptor antagonist are administered via inhalation, preferably in aerosol (e.g., mist) form.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is administered intravenously (IV), and the NMDA receptor antagonist is administered via inhalation.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is administered orally, and the NMDA receptor antagonist is administered via inhalation.
  • both the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and the NMDA receptor antagonist are administered transdermally or subcutaneously.
  • the compositions for inhalation such as pharmaceutically acceptable vehicles, etc. for the single or separate dosage forms are set forth herein.
  • the NMDA receptor antagonist used in the combination drug therapy is nitrous oxide.
  • Nitrous oxide may be administered alone, or as a therapeutic gas mixture, e.g., N 2 O and O 2 ; N 2 O and air; N 2 O and medical air (medical air being 78% nitrogen, 21% oxygen, 1% other gases); N 2 O and a N2/O 2 mix; N 2 O and O 2 enriched medical air; N 2 O and a He/O 2 mix etc.
  • the therapeutic gas mixture may further include other gases such as one or more of N 2 , Ar, CO 2 , Ne, CH 4 , He, Kr, H 2 , Xe, H 2 O (e.g., vapor), etc.
  • nitrous oxide may be administered using a blending system that combines N 2 O, O 2 and optionally other gases from separate compressed gas cylinders into a therapeutic gas mixture which is delivered to a patient via inhalation.
  • the therapeutic gas mixture containing nitrous oxide may be packaged, for example, in a pressurized tank or in small, pressurized canisters which are easy to use and/or portable.
  • the blending system and/or pressurized tanks/canisters may be adapted to fluidly connect to an inhalation device such as a device capable of generating an aerosol of the compound of Formula (I) through (V).
  • Nitrous oxide itself, or the therapeutic gas mixture comprising nitrous oxide may be used for the generation of the aerosol (i.e., as the gas phase component of the aerosol) or as a carrier gas to facilitate the transfer of a generated aerosol to a patient’s lungs.
  • N 2 O is present in the therapeutic gas mixture at a concentration ranging from 5 vol%, from 10 vol%, from 15 vol%, from 20 vol%, from 25 vol%, from 30 vol%, from 35 vol%, from 40 vol%, from 45 vol%, and up to 75 vol%, up to 70 vol%, up to 65 vol%, up to 60 vol%, up to 55 vol%, up to 50 vol%, relative to a total volume of the therapeutic gas mixture.
  • the therapeutic gas mixture containing nitrous oxide can be administered over any desired duration, e.g., 5 minutes, 10 minutes 15 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes, 40 minutes, 45 minutes, 50 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, 150 minutes, 180 minutes, or any range therebetween.
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and the NMD A receptor antagonist are each delivered by aerosol inhalation, as a single dosage form or as separate dosage forms.
  • the aerosol preferably a mist, may be generated by any capable device (e.g., a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, or nebulizer), such as those devices disclosed herein, with or without the use of a propellant.
  • a pressurized container, pump, spray, atomizer, or nebulizer such as those devices disclosed herein, with or without the use of a propellant.
  • the nitrous oxide may dually act as a carrier gas or propellant for the aerosol generation and as a therapeutic agent (an NMD A receptor antagonist).
  • the delivery device is an inhalation delivery device for delivery of the combination of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) and nitrous oxide by inhalation to a patient in need thereof, comprising an inhalation outlet portal for administration of the combination to the patient; a container configured to deliver nitrous oxide, e.g., in a therapeutic gas mixture, to the inhalation outlet portal; and a device configured to generate and deliver an aerosol comprising the compound of Formula (I) through (V) to the inhalation outlet portal.
  • the inhalation outlet portal is selected from a mouthpiece or a mask covering the patient’s nose and mouth.
  • the device configured to generate and deliver the aerosol to the inhalation outlet portal is a nebulizer.
  • the nebulizer is a jet nebulizer and the nitrous oxide gas, alone, or in combination with other gases (therapeutic gas mixture containing nitrous oxide), acts as a driving gas for the jet nebulizer.
  • nitrous oxide delivered using a nebulizer e.g., jet nebulizer
  • the device is a dual delivery device configured to administer the compound of Formula (I) through (V), preferably in the form of an aerosol, and to simultaneously administer a controlled amount of nitrous oxide, either alone or as a therapeutic gas mixture.
  • a source of nitrous oxide or a source of a therapeutic gas mixture containing nitrous oxide
  • the driving gas for the nebulization of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) is the nitrous oxide or therapeutic gas mixture containing nitrous oxide.
  • any of the delivery devices above e.g., controlled release device, implant, patch, pump, depot, inhaler, inhalation delivery device, etc.
  • the remote activation can be performed via computer or mobile app.
  • the remote activation device can be password encoded.
  • This technology enables a healthcare provider to perform telehealth sessions with a patient, during which the healthcare provider can remotely activate and administer the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, via the desired delivery device while supervising the patient on the televisit.
  • Also disclosed is a method of treating a subject with a disease or disorder comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof.
  • the disease or disorder is associated with a serotonin 5-HT 2 receptor.
  • the dosage and frequency (single or multiple doses) of the compounds herein administered can vary depending upon a variety of factors, including, but not limited to, the compound/ salt form/polymorph to be administered; the disease/condition being treated; route of administration; size, age, sex, health, body weight, body mass index, and diet of the recipient; nature and extent of symptoms of the disease being treated; presence of other diseases or other health-related problems; kind of concurrent treatment; and complications from any disease or treatment regimen.
  • Other therapeutic regimens or agents can be used in conjunction with the methods and compounds disclosed herein.
  • Therapeutically effective amounts for use in humans may be determined from animal models. For example, a dose for humans can be formulated to achieve a concentration that has been found to be effective in animals. The dosage in humans can be adjusted by monitoring response to the treatment and adjusting the dosage upwards (e.g., up-titration) or downwards (e.g., down-titration).
  • a dose for humans can be formulated to achieve a concentration that has been found to be effective in animals.
  • the dosage in humans can be adjusted by monitoring response to the treatment and adjusting the dosage upwards (e.g., up-titration) or downwards (e.g., down-titration).
  • Dosages may be varied depending upon the requirements of the subject and the active ingredient (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)) being employed.
  • the dose administered to a subject should be sufficient to affect a beneficial therapeutic response in the subject over time.
  • the size of the dose also will be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side effects. Generally, treatment is initiated with smaller dosages, which are less than the optimum dose of the active ingredient. Thereafter, the dosage is increased by small increments until the optimum effect under circumstances is reached.
  • Dosage amounts and intervals can be adjusted individually to provide levels of the administered compounds effective for the particular clinical indication being treated. This will provide a therapeutic regimen that is commensurate with the severity of the individual’s disease state.
  • Routes of administration may include oral routes (e.g., enteral/ gastric delivery, intraoral administration such buccal, lingual, and sublingual routes), parenteral routes (e.g., intravenous, intradermal, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral, intrastemal, intracranial, intramuscular, intrasynovial, and subcutaneous administration), topical routes (e.g., conjuctival, intracorneal, intraocular, ophthalmic, auricular, transdermal, nasal (e.g., intranasal), vaginal, uretheral, respiratory, and rectal administration), inhalation, or others sufficient to affect a beneficial therapeutic response.
  • oral routes e.g., enteral/ gastric delivery, intraoral administration such buccal, lingual, and sublingual routes
  • parenteral routes e.g., intravenous, intradermal, intraarterial, intraperitoneal, intrathecal, intraventricular, intraurethral
  • Administration may follow a continuous administration schedule, or an intermittent administration schedule.
  • the administration schedule may be varied depending on the active ingredient(s) employed, the condition being treated, the administration route, etc.
  • administration of a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof may be performed once a day (QD), or in divided dosages throughout the day, such as 2-times a day (BID), 3 -times a day (TID), 4-times a day (QID), or more.
  • administration may be performed nightly (QHS).
  • administration is performed as needed (PRN).
  • Administration may also be performed on a weekly basis, e.g., once a week, twice a week, three times a week, four times a week, every other week, every two weeks, etc., or less.
  • the administration schedule may also designate a defined number of treatments per treatment course, for example, the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof, may be administered 1 time, 2 times, 3 times, 4 times, 5 times, 6 times, 7 times, or 8 times per treatment course.
  • the dosing can be continuous (7 days of administration in a week) or intermitent, for example, depending on the pharmacokinetics and a particular subject’s clearance/accumulation of the drug. If intermittently, the schedule may be, for example, 4 days of administration and 3 days off (rest days) in a week or any other intermittent dosing schedule deemed appropriate using sound medical judgement. For example, intermittent dosing may involve administration of a single dose within a treatment course. The dosing whether continuous or intermittent is continued for a particular treatment course, typically at least a 28-day cycle (1 month), which can be repeated with or without a drug holiday.
  • Longer or shorter courses can also be used such as 14 days, 18 days, 21 days, 24 days, 35 days, 42 days, 48 days, or longer, or any range therebetween.
  • the course may be repeated without a drug holiday or with a drug holiday depending upon the subject.
  • Other schedules are possible depending upon the presence or absence of adverse events, response to the treatment, patient convenience, and the like.
  • compositions of the disclosure may be used as a standalone therapy. In some embodiments, the use of compositions of the disclosure may be used as an adjuvant/combination therapy. In some embodiments, the additional therapy is an antidepressant, an anticonvulsant, lisdexamfetamine dimesylate, an antipsychotic, an anxiolytic, an anti-inflammatory drug, a benzodiazepine, an analgesic drug, a cardiovascular drug, an opioid antagonist, psychotherapy, or combinations thereof.
  • additional therapy is an antidepressant, an anticonvulsant, lisdexamfetamine dimesylate, an antipsychotic, an anxiolytic, an anti-inflammatory drug, a benzodiazepine, an analgesic drug, a cardiovascular drug, an opioid antagonist, psychotherapy, or combinations thereof.
  • an effective prophylactic or therapeutic treatment regimen can be planned that does not cause substantial toxicity or adverse side effects (e.g., caused by sedative or psychotomimetic toxic spikes in plasma concentration of any of the compounds Formula (I) through (V)), and yet is entirely effective to treat the clinical symptoms demonstrated by the particular patient.
  • This planning should involve the careful choice of active ingredient by considering factors such as compound potency, relative bioavailability, patient body weight, presence and severity of adverse side effects, preferred mode of administration, and the toxicity profile of the selected agent.
  • a therapeutically effective dose may vary depending on the variety of factors described above, but is typically that which provides the compound of Formula (I) through (V) in an amount of about 0.00001 mg to about 10 mg per kilogram body weight of the recipient, or any range in between, e.g., about 0.00001 mg/kg, about 0.00005 mg/kg, about 0.0001 mg/kg, about 0.0005 mg/kg, about 0.001 mg/kg, about 0.005 mg/kg, about 0.01 mg/kg, about 0.05 mg/kg, about 0.1 mg/kg, about 0.2 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg/kg, about 0.4 mg/kg, about 0.5 mg/kg, about 0.6 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg, about 0.8 mg/kg, about 0.9 mg/kg, about 1.0 mg/kg, about 2.0 mg/kg, about 3.0 mg/kg, about 4.0 mg/kg, about 5.0 mg/kg, about 6.0 mg/kg, about 7.0 mg/kg, about 8.0 mg/kg, about 9.0 mg/kg, about
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may be administered at a psychedelic dose.
  • Psychedelic dosing by mouth or otherwise, may in some embodiments range from about 0.083 mg/kg, about 0.09 mg/kg, about 0.1 mg/kg, about 0.15 mg/kg, about 0.2 mg/kg, about 0.25 mg/kg, about 0.3 mg/kg, about 0.35 mg/kg, about 0.4 mg/kg, about 0.45 mg/kg, about 0.5 mg/kg, and up to about 5 mg/kg, about 4 mg/kg, about 3 mg/kg, about 2 mg/kg, about 1 mg/kg, about 0.95 mg/kg, about 0.9 mg/kg, about 0.85 mg/kg, about 0.8 mg/kg, about 0.75 mg/kg, about 0.7 mg/kg, about 0.65 mg/kg, about 0.6 mg/kg, about 0.55 mg/kg of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) (on an active basis).
  • psychedelic doses are administered once by mouth, with the possibility of repeat doses at least one week apart. In some instances, no more than 5 doses are given in any one course of treatment. Courses can be repeated as necessary, with or without a drug holiday.
  • Such acute treatment regimens may be accompanied by psychotherapy, before, during, and/or after the psychedelic dose.
  • psychotherapy e.g., major depressive disorder (MDD), therapy resistant depression (TRD), anxiety disorders, and substance use disorders (e.g., alcohol use disorder, opioid use disorder, amphetamine use disorder, nicotine use disorder, smoking, and cocaine use disorder).
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may be administered at sub-psychedelic/ sub-psychoactive (yet still potentially serotonergic) concentrations to achieve durable therapeutic benefits, with decreased toxicity, and may thus be suitable for microdosing.
  • Sub-psychedelic dosing by mouth or otherwise, may in some embodiments range from about 0.00001 mg/kg, about 0.00005 mg/kg, about 0.0001 mg/kg, about 0.0005 mg/kg, about 0.001 mg/kg, about 0.005 mg/kg, about 0.006 mg/kg, about 0.008 mg/kg, about 0.009 mg/kg, about 0.01 mg/kg, and less than about 0.083 mg/kg, about 0.08 mg/kg, about 0.075 mg/kg, about 0.07 mg/kg, about 0.06 mg/kg, about 0.05 mg/kg, about 0.04 mg/kg, about 0.03 mg/kg, about 0.02 mg/kg of the compound of Formula (I) through (V) (on an active basis).
  • sub-psychedelic doses are administered orally up to every day, for a treatment course (e.g., 1 month).
  • a treatment course e.g. 1 month
  • dosing can be less frequent or more frequent as deemed appropriate.
  • Courses can be repeated as necessary, with or without a drug holiday.
  • Sub-psychedelic dosing can also be carried out, for example, by transdermal delivery, subcutaneous administration, etc., via modified, controlled, slow, or extended release dosage forms, including, but not limited to, depot dosage forms, implants, patches, and pumps, which can be optionally remotely controlled.
  • dosage forms including, but not limited to, depot dosage forms, implants, patches, and pumps, which can be optionally remotely controlled.
  • doses would achieve similar blood levels as low oral dosing, but would nevertheless be sub-psychedelic.
  • Sub-psychedelic doses can be used, e.g., for the chronic treatment a variety of diseases or disorders disclosed herein, examples of which include, but are not limited to, inflammation, pain, and neuroinflammation.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may be used for a maintenance regimen.
  • a “maintenance regimen” generally refers to the administration of the compounds of the present disclosure (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)) following achievement of a target dose, e.g., following completion of an up-titration regimen, and/or following a positive clinical response, e.g., improvement of the patient's condition, either to the same drug or to a different drug.
  • the patient is administered a first drug for a therapeutic regimen and a second drug for a maintenance regimen, wherein the first and second drugs are different.
  • the patient may be administered a therapeutic regimen of a first drug which is not a compound of the present disclosure (e.g., the first drug is a serotonergic psychedelic such as LSD, psilocybin, MDMA, dimethyltryptamine, etc., or a non-psychedelic drug), followed by a compound of the present disclosure (as the second drug) in a maintenance regimen.
  • a different compound of the present disclosure is used for the therapeutic regimen (first drug) than is used for the maintenance regimen (second drug).
  • the patient is administered the same compound of the present disclosure for both a therapeutic regimen and a maintenance regimen.
  • the maintenance dose of the compounds of the present disclosure may be used to ‘maintain’ the therapeutic response and/or to prevent occurrences of relapse.
  • the maintenance dose of the compound may be at or below the therapeutic dose.
  • the maintenance dose is a psychedelic dose.
  • the maintenance dose is a sub-psychedelic dose.
  • dosing is carried out daily or intermittently for the maintenance regimen, however, maintenance regimens can also be carried out continuously, for example, over several days, weeks, months, or years.
  • the maintenance dose may be given to a patient over a long period of time, even chronically.
  • the subjects treated herein may have a disease or disorder associated with a serotonin 5-HT 2 receptor.
  • the disease or disorder is a neuropsychiatric disease or disorder or an inflammatory disease or disorder.
  • the neuropsychiatric disease or disorder is not schizophrenia or cognitive deficits in schizophrenia.
  • the disease or disorder is a central nervous system (CNS) disorder, including, but not limited to, major depressive disorder (MDD), treatment-resistant depression (TRJD), post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), bipolar and related disorders (including, but not limited to, bipolar I disorder, bipolar II disorder, cyclothymic disorder), obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder, substance use disorders (including, but not limited to, alcohol use disorder, opioid use disorder, amphetamine use disorder, nicotine use disorder, smoking, and cocaine use disorder), eating disorders (including, but not limited to anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge-eating disorder, etc.), Alzheimer’s disease, cluster headache and migraine, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), pain and neuropathic pain, aphantasia, childhood-onset fluency disorder, major neurocognitive disorder, mild neurocognitive disorder, suicidal ideation, suicidal behavior, major
  • CNS
  • the disease or disorder is major depressive disorder (MDD).
  • MDD major depressive disorder
  • the disease or disorder is treatment-resistant depression (TRD).
  • TRD treatment-resistant depression
  • the disease or disorder is an anxiety-related disorder, such as generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder, panic disorder, a phobia-related disorder (e.g., phobias related to flying, heights, specific animals such as spiders/dogs/snakes, receiving injections, blood, etc., agoraphobia), separation anxiety disorder, selective mutism, etc.
  • GAD generalized anxiety disorder
  • the disease or disorder is social anxiety disorder.
  • the disease or disorder is a compulsive disorder, such as obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), body-focused repetitive behavior, hoarding disorder, gambling disorder, compulsive buying, compulsive internet use, compulsive video gaming, compulsive sexual behavior, compulsive eating, compulsive exercise, etc.
  • OCD obsessive-compulsive disorder
  • the disease or disorder is headaches (e.g., cluster headache, migraine, etc.).
  • the disease or disorder is a substance use disorder. In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is alcohol use disorder. In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is nicotine use (e.g., smoking) disorder, and the therapy is used for e.g., smoking cessation.
  • the disease or disorder is a disease or disorder characterized by, or otherwise associated with, neuroinflammation.
  • Compounds and compositions of the present disclosure may provide cognitive benefits to subject’s suffering from neurological and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer’s disease and other dementia subtypes, Parkinson’s disease, and others where neuroinflammation is a hallmark of disease pathophysiology and progression.
  • neurological and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer’s disease and other dementia subtypes, Parkinson’s disease, and others where neuroinflammation is a hallmark of disease pathophysiology and progression.
  • psychedelics including tryptamine psychedelics (e.g., psilocybin)
  • tryptamine psychedelics e.g., psilocybin
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of neurological and neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer’s disease, dementia subtypes, and Parkinson’s disease, where neuroinflammation is associated with disease pathogenesis.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of Alzheimer’ s disease.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of dementia.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of Parkinson’s disease.
  • such treatment may stimulate neurogenesis, provoke neuroplastic changes, and/or provide neuroinflammatory benefits (e.g., reduced neuroinflammation compared to prior to the beginning of treatment), and as a result, may slow or prevent disease progression, slow or reverse brain atrophy, and reduce symptoms associated therewith (e.g., memory loss in the case of Alzheimer’s and related dementia disorders).
  • neuroinflammatory benefits e.g., reduced neuroinflammation compared to prior to the beginning of treatment
  • symptoms associated therewith e.g., memory loss in the case of Alzheimer’s and related dementia disorders.
  • pharmaceutical compositions adapted for oral and/or extended-release dosing are appropriate for such treatment methods, with sub-psychedelic dosing being preferred.
  • Parkinson's disease many of the behavioral issues associated with chronic and/or life-threatening illnesses, including neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer’s disease, may benefit from treatment with the compounds disclosed herein. Indeed, depression, anxiety, or stress can be common among patients who have chronic and/or life-threatening illnesses such as Alzheimer's disease, autoimmune diseases (e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, and psoriasis), cancer, coronary heart disease, diabetes, epilepsy, HIV/AIDS, hypothyroidism, multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, and stroke. For example, depression is common in Alzheimer’s disease as a consequence of the disease, as well as being a risk factor for the disease itself.
  • autoimmune diseases e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, and psoriasis
  • cancer e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, rheuma
  • Symptoms of depression, anxiety, or stress can occur after diagnosis with the disease or illness. Patients that have depression, anxiety, or stress concurrent with another medical disease or illness can have more severe symptoms of both illnesses and symptoms of depression, anxiety, or stress can continue even as a patient’s physical health improves. Compounds described herein can be used to treat depression, anxiety, and/or stress associated with a chronic or life-threatening disease or illness.
  • the methods herein are used to treat symptoms, e.g., depression, anxiety, and/or stress, associated with a chronic and/or life-threatening disease or disorder.
  • the disease or disorder is Alzheimer’s disease.
  • the methods herein are used for the treatment of depression, anxiety, and/or stress associated with Alzheimer’s disease.
  • the disease or disorder is Parkinson’s disease.
  • the methods herein are used for the treatment of depression, anxiety, and/or stress associated with Parkinson’s disease.
  • the disease or disorder is cancer related depression and anxiety.
  • oral and/or extended-release dosing is appropriate for such applications, particularly when blood concentrations of active ingredient (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)) are kept below the psychedelic threshold.
  • the disease or disorder is a neurological and developmental disorder such as autism spectrum disorder, including Asperger’s syndrome.
  • Asperger’s syndrome is a subtype of autism spectrum disorder that is treatable with anxiety drugs.
  • Subjects with autism spectrum disorder may present with various signs and symptoms, including, but not limited to, a preference for non-social stimuli, aberrant non-verbal social behaviors, decreased attention to social stimuli, irritability, anxiety (e.g., generalized anxiety and social anxiety in particular), and depression.
  • the autism spectrum disorder comprises a medical diagnosis based on the criteria and classification from Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th Ed (DSM-5).
  • the disease or disorder is a genetic condition that causes learning disabilities and cognitive impairment.
  • a genetic condition is fragile X syndrome, caused by changes in the gene Fragile X Messenger Ribonucleoprotein 1 (FMRI), which can cause mild to moderate intellectual disabilities in most males and about one-third of affected females.
  • FMRI Fragile X Messenger Ribonucleoprotein 1
  • Fragile X syndrome and autism spectrum disorder are closely associated because the FMRI gene is a leading genetic cause of autism spectrum disorder (see Markopoulos A, Inserra A, De Gregorio D, Gobbi G. Evaluating the Potential Use of Serotonergic Psychedelics in Autism Spectrum Disorder. Front Pharmacol. 2022;12:749068).
  • Subjects with fragile X syndrome may display anxiety, hyperactive behavior (e.g., fidgeting and impulsive actions), attention deficit disorder, mood and aggression abnormalities, poor recognition memory, and/or features of autism spectrum disorder, and these signs and symptoms may be treated with the methods herein.
  • Clinical trials with psychedelics for the treatment of fragile X syndrome and autism spectrum disorder are currently ongoing (ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT04869930).
  • the disease or disorder is mental distress, e.g., mental distress in frontline healthcare workers.
  • the disease or disorder includes conditions of the autonomic nervous system (ANS).
  • ANS autonomic nervous system
  • the disease or disorder includes pulmonary disorders including asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder (COPD).
  • pulmonary disorders including asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder (COPD).
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder
  • the disease or disorder includes cardiovascular disorders including atherosclerosis.
  • the disclosure relates to a method of treating an ocular disease, such as uveitis, corneal disease, ulceris, iridocyclitis, glaucoma, and cataracts, by administering ophthalmically a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds described herein to a subject in need thereof.
  • an ocular disease such as uveitis, corneal disease, ulceris, iridocyclitis, glaucoma, and cataracts
  • compounds herein may be administered in the form of solutions, suspensions, ointments, emulsions, gel-forming solutions, powders for solutions, gels, ocular inserts, and implants.
  • the compounds are administered in the form of an eye drop formulation.
  • the administering physician can provide a method of treatment that is prophylactic or therapeutic by adjusting the amount and timing of any of the compounds/forms described herein on the basis of observations of one or more symptoms of the disorder or condition being treated.
  • the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal is a human.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of increasing oral bioavailability relative to DMT, 5- MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) to a patient in need thereof.
  • a compound of Formula (II) may increase oral bioavailability relative to DMT.
  • use of a compound of Formula (III) may increase oral bioavailability relative to psilocin.
  • use of a compound of Formula (IV) may increase oral bioavailability relative to 5-MeO-DMT.
  • use of a compound of Formula (V) may increase oral bioavailability relative to psilocybin.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of reducing psychedelic side effects relative to DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein (i.e., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) to a patient in need thereof.
  • a compound as disclosed herein i.e., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof
  • hallucinogenic side effects and “psychedelic side effects” are used in the present disclosure interchangeably to refer to unwanted and/or unintended secondary effects caused by the administration of a medicament to an individual resulting in subjective experiences being qualitatively different from those of ordinary consciousness.
  • These experiences can include derealization, depersonalization, hallucinations and/or sensory distortions in the visual, auditory, olfactory, tactile, proprioceptive and/or interoceptive spheres and/or any other perceptual modifications, and/or any other substantial subjective changes in cognition, memory, emotion and consciousness.
  • the administration of the compounds of the present disclosure causes no hallucinogenic and/or psychedelic side effects and/or less hallucinogenic and/or psychedelic side effects relative to DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin.
  • the administration of the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof alleviates, reduces, removes, and/or eliminates the hallucinogenic and/or psychedelic side effects compared to those caused by administration of DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of reducing dose related side-effects, e.g., nausea, relative to treatment with DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein (e.g., the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) to a subject in need thereof.
  • a compound as disclosed herein e.g., the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) may provide better brain penetration (i.e., a higher braimplasma ratio) than that obtained from administration of DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin.
  • the effective dosing for the compounds of the present disclosure can be lowered, thereby reducing dose related side effects such as nausea.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of increasing duration of therapeutic effect relative to DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein to a patient in need thereof.
  • a compound of Formula (II) may increase duration of action relative to DMT.
  • use of a compound of Formula (III) may increase duration of action relative to psilocin.
  • use of a compound of Formula (IV) may increase duration of action relative to 5-MeO-DMT.
  • N,N-dimethyl-2-(5-((trifluoromethyl)thio)-lH-indol-3-yl)ethan-l-amine (1-3) Synthesis of N,N-dimethyl-2-(5-((trifluoromethyl)thio)- 1 H-indol-3-yl)ethan- 1 -amine (1-3) was carried out according to Fig. 2. 5-iodo-lH-indole (I-3a) was reacted with BOC 2 O (1.2 eq.) and cat. DMAP to provide intermediate I-3b in quantitative yield.
  • a Pd/XPhos-catalyzed cross coupling was performed by reacting intermediate I-3b with AgSCF 3 (1.3 eq.) using (1,5- cyclooctadiene)bis(trimethylsilylmethyl)palladium(II) catalyst (0.14 eq.) in the presence of XPhos (0.17 eq.) and phenyltriethylammonium iodide (1.3 eq.) in toluene at 85-90°C for 1.5 h to provide intermediate I-3c in 55% yield. Boc removal with TFA/DCM (1/1) for 2 h at room temperature, followed by a basic aqueous wash then provided intermediate 1-3 d in quantitative yield.
  • the HC1 salt of II-6 was prepared by dissolving II-6 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with HC1 in diethyl ether (4 eq. HC1).
  • the fumarate salt of II-6 was prepared by dissolving II-6 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with fumaric acid (1 eq.).
  • sub-psychedelic doses are administered orally up to every day, for a treatment course (e.g., 1 month).
  • a treatment course e.g. 1 month
  • dosing can be less frequent or more frequent as deemed appropriate.
  • Courses can be repeated as necessary, with or without a drug holiday.
  • Sub-psychedelic dosing can also be carried out, for example, by transdermal delivery, subcutaneous administration, etc., via modified, controlled, slow, or extended release dosage forms, including, but not limited to, depot dosage forms, implants, patches, and pumps, which can be optionally remotely controlled.
  • dosage forms including, but not limited to, depot dosage forms, implants, patches, and pumps, which can be optionally remotely controlled.
  • doses would achieve similar blood levels as low oral dosing, but would nevertheless be sub-psychedelic.
  • Sub-psychedelic doses can be used, e.g., for the chronic treatment a variety of diseases or disorders disclosed herein, examples of which include, but are not limited to, inflammation, pain, and neuroinflammation.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure may be used for a maintenance regimen.
  • a “maintenance regimen” generally refers to the administration of the compounds of the present disclosure (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)) following achievement of a target dose, e.g., following completion of an up-titration regimen, and/or following a positive clinical response, e.g., improvement of the patient's condition, either to the same drug or to a different drug.
  • the patient is administered a first drug for a therapeutic regimen and a second drug for a maintenance regimen, wherein the first and second drugs are different.
  • the patient may be administered a therapeutic regimen of a first drug which is not a compound of the present disclosure (e.g., the first drag is a serotonergic psychedelic such as LSD, psilocybin, MDMA, dimethyltryptamine, etc., or a non-psychedelic drug), followed by a compound of the present disclosure (as the second drug) in a maintenance regimen.
  • a different compound of the present disclosure is used for the therapeutic regimen (first drug) than is used for the maintenance regimen (second drug).
  • the patient is administered the same compound of the present disclosure for both a therapeutic regimen and a maintenance regimen.
  • the maintenance dose of the compounds of the present disclosure may be used to ‘maintain’ the therapeutic response and/or to prevent occurrences of relapse.
  • the maintenance dose of the compound may be at or below the therapeutic dose.
  • the maintenance dose is a psychedelic dose.
  • the maintenance dose is a sub- psychedelic dose.
  • dosing is carried out daily or intermittently for the maintenance regimen, however, maintenance regimens can also be carried out continuously, for example, over several days, weeks, months, or years.
  • the maintenance dose may be given to a patient over a long period of time, even chronically.
  • the subjects treated herein may have a disease or disorder associated with a serotonin 5- HT 2 receptor.
  • the disease or disorder is a neuropsychiatric disease or disorder or an inflammatory disease or disorder.
  • the neuropsychiatric disease or disorder is not schizophrenia or cognitive deficits in schizophrenia.
  • the disease or disorder is a central nervous system (CNS) disorder, including, but not limited to, major depressive disorder (MDD), treatment-resistant depression (TRD), post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), bipolar and related disorders (including, but not limited to, bipolar I disorder, bipolar II disorder, cyclothymic disorder), obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD), generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder, substance use disorders (including, but not limited to, alcohol use disorder, opioid use disorder, amphetamine use disorder, nicotine use disorder, smoking, and cocaine use disorder), eating disorders (including, but not limited to anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge-eating disorder, etc.), Alzheimer’s disease, cluster headache and migraine, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), pain and neuropathic pain, aphantasia, childhood-onset fluency disorder, major neurocognitive disorder, mild neurocognitive disorder, suicidal ideation, suicidal behavior, major de
  • CNS
  • the disease or disorder is major depressive disorder (MDD).
  • MDD major depressive disorder
  • the disease or disorder is treatment-resistant depression (TRD).
  • TRD treatment-resistant depression
  • the disease or disorder is an anxiety-related disorder, such as generalized anxiety disorder (GAD), social anxiety disorder, panic disorder, a phobia-related disorder (e.g., phobias related to flying, heights, specific animals such as spiders/dogs/snakes, receiving injections, blood, etc., agoraphobia), separation anxiety disorder, selective mutism, etc.
  • GAD generalized anxiety disorder
  • the disease or disorder is social anxiety disorder.
  • the disease or disorder is a compulsive disorder, such as obsessive- compulsive disorder (OCD), body-focused repetitive behavior, hoarding disorder, gambling disorder, compulsive buying, compulsive internet use, compulsive video gaming, compulsive sexual behavior, compulsive eating, compulsive exercise, etc.
  • OCD obsessive-compulsive disorder
  • the disease or disorder is headaches (e.g., cluster headache, migraine, etc.).
  • the disease or disorder is a substance use disorder. In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is alcohol use disorder. In some embodiments, the disease or disorder is nicotine use (e.g., smoking) disorder, and the therapy is used for e.g., smoking cessation.
  • the disease or disorder is a disease or disorder characterized by, or otherwise associated with, neuroinflammation.
  • Compounds and compositions of the present disclosure may provide cognitive benefits to subject’s suffering from neurological and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer’s disease and other dementia subtypes, Parkinson’s disease, and others where neuroinflammation is a hallmark of disease pathophysiology and progression.
  • neurological and neurodegenerative diseases such as Alzheimer’s disease and other dementia subtypes, Parkinson’s disease, and others where neuroinflammation is a hallmark of disease pathophysiology and progression.
  • psychedelics including tryptamine psychedelics (e.g., psilocybin)
  • tryptamine psychedelics e.g., psilocybin
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of neurological and neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer’s disease, dementia subtypes, and Parkinson’s disease, where neuroinflammation is associated with disease pathogenesis.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of Alzheimer’s disease.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of dementia.
  • the compounds of the present disclosure are used for the treatment of Parkinson’s disease.
  • such treatment may stimulate neurogenesis, provoke neuroplastic changes, and/or provide neuroinflammatory benefits (e.g., reduced neuroinflammation compared to prior to the beginning of treatment), and as a result, may slow or prevent disease progression, slow or reverse brain atrophy, and reduce symptoms associated therewith (e.g., memory loss in the case of Alzheimer’s and related dementia disorders).
  • neuroinflammatory benefits e.g., reduced neuroinflammation compared to prior to the beginning of treatment
  • symptoms associated therewith e.g., memory loss in the case of Alzheimer’s and related dementia disorders.
  • pharmaceutical compositions adapted for oral and/or extended-release dosing are appropriate for such treatment methods, with sub-psychedelic dosing being preferred.
  • Parkinson's disease many of the behavioral issues associated with chronic and/or life-threatening illnesses, including neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer’s disease, may benefit from treatment with the compounds disclosed herein. Indeed, depression, anxiety, or stress can be common among patients who have chronic and/or life-threatening illnesses such as Alzheimer's disease, autoimmune diseases (e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, and psoriasis), cancer, coronary heart disease, diabetes, epilepsy, HJV/AIDS, hypothyroidism, multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, and stroke. For example, depression is common in Alzheimer’s disease as a consequence of the disease, as well as being a risk factor for the disease itself.
  • autoimmune diseases e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, and psoriasis
  • cancer e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, rhe
  • Symptoms of depression, anxiety, or stress can occur after diagnosis with the disease or illness. Patients that have depression, anxiety, or stress concurrent with another medical disease or illness can have more severe symptoms of both illnesses and symptoms of depression, anxiety, or stress can continue even as a patient’s physical health improves. Compounds described herein can be used to treat depression, anxiety, and/or stress associated with a chronic or life-threatening disease or illness.
  • the methods herein are used to treat symptoms, e.g., depression, anxiety, and/or stress, associated with a chronic and/or life-threatening disease or disorder.
  • the disease or disorder is Alzheimer’s disease.
  • the methods herein are used for the treatment of depression, anxiety, and/or stress associated with Alzheimer’s disease.
  • the disease or disorder is Parkinson’s disease.
  • the methods herein are used for the treatment of depression, anxiety, and/or stress associated with Parkinson’s disease.
  • the disease or disorder is cancer related depression and anxiety.
  • oral and/or extended-release dosing is appropriate for such applications, particularly when blood concentrations of active ingredient (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V)) are kept below the psychedelic threshold.
  • the disease or disorder is a neurological and developmental disorder such as autism spectrum disorder, including Asperger’s syndrome.
  • Asperger’s syndrome is a subtype of autism spectrum disorder that is treatable with anxiety drugs.
  • Subjects with autism spectrum disorder may present with various signs and symptoms, including, but not limited to, a preference for non-social stimuli, aberrant non-verbal social behaviors, decreased attention to social stimuli, irritability, anxiety (e.g., generalized anxiety and social anxiety in particular), and depression.
  • the autism spectrum disorder comprises a medical diagnosis based on the criteria and classification from Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 5th Ed (DSM-5).
  • the disease or disorder is a genetic condition that causes learning disabilities and cognitive impairment.
  • a genetic condition is fragile X syndrome, caused by changes in the gene Fragile X Messenger Ribonucleoprotein 1 (FMR1), which can cause mild to moderate intellectual disabilities in most males and about one-third of affected females.
  • FMR1 Fragile X Messenger Ribonucleoprotein 1
  • Fragile X syndrome and autism spectrum disorder are closely associated because the FMRI gene is a leading genetic cause of autism spectrum disorder (see Markopoulos A, Inserra A, De Gregorio D, Gobbi G. Evaluating the Potential Use of Serotonergic Psychedelics in Autism Spectrum Disorder. Front Pharmacol. 2022;12:749068).
  • Subjects with fragile X syndrome may display anxiety, hyperactive behavior (e.g., fidgeting and impulsive actions), atention deficit disorder, mood and aggression abnormalities, poor recognition memory, and/or features of autism spectrum disorder, and these signs and symptoms may be treated with the methods herein.
  • Clinical trials with psychedelics for the treatment of fragile X syndrome and autism spectrum disorder are currently ongoing (ClinicalTrials.gov, number NCT04869930).
  • the disease or disorder is mental distress, e.g., mental distress in frontline healthcare workers.
  • the disease or disorder includes conditions of the autonomic nervous system (ANS).
  • ANS autonomic nervous system
  • the disease or disorder includes pulmonary disorders including asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder (COPD).
  • pulmonary disorders including asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder (COPD).
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder
  • the disease or disorder includes cardiovascular disorders including atherosclerosis.
  • the disclosure relates to a method of treating an ocular disease, such as uveitis, comeal disease, crizis, iridocyclitis, glaucoma, and cataracts, by administering ophthalmically a therapeutically effective amount of any of the compounds described herein to a subject in need thereof.
  • an ocular disease such as uveitis, comeal disease, crizis, iridocyclitis, glaucoma, and cataracts
  • compounds herein may be administered in the form of solutions, suspensions, ointments, emulsions, gel-forming solutions, powders for solutions, gels, ocular inserts, and implants.
  • the compounds are administered in the form of an eye drop formulation.
  • the administering physician can provide a method of treatment that is prophylactic or therapeutic by adjusting the amount and timing of any of the compounds/forms described herein on the basis of observations of one or more symptoms of the disorder or condition being treated.
  • the subject is a mammal. In some embodiments, the mammal is a human.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of increasing oral bioavailability relative to DMT, 5- MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein (e.g., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) to a patient in need thereof.
  • a compound of Formula (II) may increase oral bioavailability relative to DMT.
  • use of a compound of Formula (III) may increase oral bioavailability relative to psilocin.
  • use of a compound of Formula (IV) may increase oral bioavailability relative to 5-MeO-DMT.
  • use of a compound of Formula (V) may increase oral bioavailability relative to psilocybin.
  • a method of reducing psychedelic side effects relative to DMT, 5- MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein (i.e., a compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) to a patient in need thereof.
  • hallucinogenic side effects and “psychedelic side effects” are used in the present disclosure interchangeably to refer to unwanted and/or unintended secondary effects caused by the administration of a medicament to an individual resulting in subjective experiences being qualitatively different from those of ordinary consciousness. These experiences can include derealization, depersonalization, hallucinations and/or sensory distortions in the visual, auditory, olfactory, tactile, proprioceptive and/or interoceptive spheres and/or any other perceptual modifications, and/or any other substantial subjective changes in cognition, memory, emotion and consciousness.
  • the administration of the compounds of the present disclosure causes no hallucinogenic and/or psychedelic side effects and/or less hallucinogenic and/or psychedelic side effects relative to DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin.
  • the administration of the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof alleviates, reduces, removes, and/or eliminates the hallucinogenic and/or psychedelic side effects compared to those caused by administration of DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of reducing dose related side-effects, e.g., nausea, relative to treatment with DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein (e.g., the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof) to a subject in need thereof.
  • a compound as disclosed herein e.g., the compound of Formula (I) through (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, tautomer, solvate, polymorph, or prodrug thereof
  • the compound of Formula (I) through (V) may provide better brain penetration (i.e., a higher brain:plasma ratio) than that obtained from administration of DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, psilocybin, and/or psilocin.
  • the effective dosing for the compounds of the present disclosure can be lowered, thereby reducing dose related side effects such as nausea.
  • Also disclosed herein is a method of increasing duration of therapeutic effect relative to DMT, 5-MeO-DMT, and/or psilocin, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as disclosed herein to a patient in need thereof.
  • a compound of Formula (II) may increase duration of action relative to DMT.
  • use of a compound of Formula (III) may increase duration of action relative to psilocin.
  • use of a compound of Formula (IV) may increase duration of action relative to 5-MeO- DMT.
  • a Pd/XPhos-catalyzed cross coupling was performed by reacting intermediate I-3b with AgSCF 3 (1.3 eq.) using (1,5- cyclooctadiene)bis(trimethylsilylmethyl)palladium(II) catalyst (0.14 eq.) in the presence of XPhos (0.17 eq.) and phenyltriethylammonium iodide (1.3 eq.) in toluene at 85-90°C for 1.5 h to provide intermediate I-3c in 55% yield. Boc removal with TFA/DCM (1/1) for 2 h at room temperature, followed by a basic aqueous wash then provided intermediate I-3d in quantitative yield.
  • the HCl salt of II-6 was prepared by dissolving II-6 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with HCl in diethyl ether (4 eq. HC1).
  • the fumarate salt of II-6 was prepared by dissolving II-6 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with fumaric acid (1 eq.).
  • trifluoromethanesulfmyl chloride was prepared in situ from sodium triflinate (2 eq.) and POCI 3 (1 eq.) in ethyl acetate, and after 5 min was reacted with intermediate II- 15c in ethyl acetate using DIPEA (1 eq.) for 60 min at room temperature to produce crude product residue which was purified by flash column chromatography to provide the title compound in 63% yield; the structure was confirmed by 1 H NMR, LC and MS.
  • the fumarate salt of III-6 was prepared by dissolving HI-6 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with fumaric acid (1 eq.).
  • the HC1 salt of IV-3 was prepared by dissolving IV-3 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with HC1 in diethyl ether.
  • the HCl salt of IV-40 was prepared by dissolving IV-40 (free base) prepared above in methanol followed by treatment with HC1 in diethyl ether.
  • Binding affinity (K i ) and functional potency and efficacy (EC50 and EMAX) values of the compounds were measured.
  • Receptor Affinity Assays 5-HT 2 (A,B,C) receptor affinities were determined by radioligand competition binding as previously described (Canal, C. E., Cordova- Sintjago, T., Liu, Y., Kim, M. S., Morgan, D., and Booth, R. G., 2013, Molecular pharmacology and ligand docking studies reveal a single amino acid difference between mouse and human serotonin 5-HT2A receptors that impacts behavioral translation of novel 4-phenyl-2- dimethylaminotetralin ligands, J Pharmacol Exp Ther 347, 705-716; Armstrong, J.
  • Radioligand competition binding was performed as previously described (Saraf, T. S., Felsing, D. E., Armstrong, J. L., Booth, R. G., and Canal, C. E., 2021, Evaluation of lorcaserin as an anticonvulsant in juvenile Fmrl knockout mice, Epilepsy Res 175, 106677), with minor modifications, using human cloned 5-HT 2A receptors. Plasmids encoding human serotonin 5-HT 2A receptor cDNA were procured from the cDNA Resource Center.
  • Human embryonic kidney cells (HEK293, ATCC CRL-1573) were grown in a cell incubator in 100 mm dishes with antibiotic- free Dulbecco’s modified Eagle’s medium containing 10% fetal bovine serum. Cells were transfected at ⁇ 85% confluency with 5-15 ⁇ g cDNA using TransIT-2020 reagent (Mirus Bio, Madison, Wisconsin). After approximately 48 hours, cell membrane was collected via centrifugation. For all experiments, serotonin (5-HT) hydrochloride was used as a positive control, and mianserin hydrochloride (10 p.M) was used to define non-specific binding.
  • 5-HT serotonin
  • Each cell membrane homogenate expressing 5-HT 2A receptors was incubated at room temperature in 96- well plates with [ 3 H]Lysergic acid diethylamide ([ 3 H]LSD), between 0.5 and 1 nM, in the absence or presence of test compounds in a buffer for 90 minutes. Following equilibration, each sample was filtered rapidly under vacuum through fiberglass filters presoaked in a buffer and washed by vacuum several times with an ice-cold buffer. Filters were soaked with scintillation fluid and counts per minute were detected using photodetectors (Microbeta Scintillation Counter).
  • K d for [ 3 H]LSD was set to 0.78 nM and the IC 50 values were computed using nonlinear, least squares regression analyses and then converted to K i values using the Cheng-Prusoff equation (GraphPad Prism 9.0, San Diego, California). Data shown are the results from all experiments combined.
  • G protein-coupled receptors including the 5-HT 2A receptor, can exist in multiple conformations, and ligands, typically agonist ligands, have unique affinities for these conformations of the receptor (Kenakin, T. Theoretical Aspects of GPCR-Ligand Complex Pharmacology, Chem. Rev. 2017, 117, 1, 4-20).
  • 5-HT 2 receptor-mediated Gq stimulation [phosphoinositide hydrolysis leading to the production of inositol phosphate 1 (IP1)] — canonical signaling pathways — were measured as previously described (Canal, C. E., Cordova-Sintjago, T., Liu, Y., Kim, M. S., Morgan, D., and Booth, R. G., 2013, Molecular pharmacology and ligand docking studies reveal a single amino acid difference between mouse and human serotonin 5-HT2A receptors that impacts behavioral translation of novel 4-phenyl-2-dimethylaminotetralin ligands, J Pharmacol Exp Ther 347, 705- 716; Canal, C.
  • CHO-K1 or HEK293 cells expressing a single serotonergic 5-HT 2 receptor subtype were incubated with test compounds and 5-HT or DOI (positive control) in stimulation buffer containing LiCl. After equilibration, the reaction was terminated with the donor and acceptor fluorescent conjugates in lysis buffer, and FRET was measured with a microplate reader (Berthold Mithras). Data were fit to non-linear curves to calculate potencies (e.g., EC 50 ) and efficacies (e.g., E MAX ), relative to positive controls (e.g., serotonin).
  • potencies e.g., EC 50
  • efficacies e.g., E MAX
  • the reaction mixture minus NADPH, was prepared as described below.
  • the test compound was added into the reaction mixture at a final concentration of 1 ⁇ M.
  • the control compound, testosterone was run simultaneously with the test compound in a separate reaction.
  • the reaction mixture (without cofactor) was equilibrated in a shaking water bath at 37°C for 5 minutes.
  • the reaction was initiated by the addition of the cofactor, and the mixture was incubated in a shaking water bath at 37°C. Aliquots (150 ⁇ L) were withdrawn at 0, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60, and 120 minutes.
  • Test compound and testosterone samples were immediately combined with 150 ⁇ L of ice-cold acetonitrile (ACN) containing 0.1% formic acid and internal standard to terminate the reaction. The samples were then mixed and centrifuged to precipitate proteins. All samples were assayed by LC-MS/MS using electrospray ionization. The peak area response ratio (PARR) of analyte to internal standard at each time point was compared to the PARR at time 0 to determine the percent remaining at each time point. Half-lives were calculated using GraphPad software, fitting to a single-phase exponential decay equation. The reaction composition is provided in Table 1. Table 1.
  • HTR Head-twitch response
  • the HTR assay was performed in adult, male C57BL/6J mice, procured from the Jackson Laboratory (Bar Harbor, Maine), as previously described (Canal, C. E., and Morgan, D., 2012, Head-twitch response in rodents induced by the hallucinogen 2,5-dimethoxy-4-iodoamphetamine: a comprehensive history, a re-evaluation of mechanisms, and its utility as a model, Drug Test Anal 4, 556-576; Saraf, T. S., Felsing, D. E., Armstrong, J. L., Booth, R. G., and Canal, C.
  • mice E., 2021, Evaluation of lorcaserin as an anticonvulsant in juvenile Fmrl knockout mice, Epilepsy Res 175, 106677).
  • Mice were housed in standard laboratory cages with ad libitum access to food and water, and were acclimated to the vivarium for at least one week prior to testing in a procedure room. On the day of testing, mice were acclimated to the procedure room in their home cages for ⁇ 60 min before administration of test compounds.
  • Test articles were administered at 10 mg/kg by oral gavage and mice were placed immediately thereafter in a clear, polycarbonate box (46x20x20 cm), and HTRs were counted for 30 consecutive minutes, using hand-held tally counters, by two trained observers who were blind to treatment.
  • mice were housed in standard laboratory cages with ad libitum access to food and water, and were acclimated to the vivarium for at least one week prior to testing in a procedure room. In a typical experiment, mice were administered 10 mg/kg of test compound by oral gavage and plasma and brain samples were collected at 10, 30, and 120 min with n-3 for each time point. Quantification of the parent molecule was done using LC-MS/MS method (LLOQ, 0.9 nM).
  • III-2 was also a partial agonist at 5HT 2B receptors, with an EC50 of 96 nM.
  • IV-21 was a low potency, EC50 >3 ⁇ M, agonist at 5-HT 2A , though, the dose-response curve had not plateaued at the highest concentration tested, 3 ⁇ M. These results are consistent with agonist effects observed in the independent screening test.
  • IV-21 was also a partial agonist at 5HT 2B receptors, with an EC50 of 394 nM.
  • 11-15 showed inverse agonist efficacy at 5-HT 2A receptors at both 500 nM and 50 ⁇ M concentrations.
  • II- 15 showed very low (>3 ⁇ M) 5-HT 2A A affinity in a competition binding assay with [125IJ]DOI, another 5-HT 2A agonist radioligand; these data suggest II-15, like other compounds in this series, has unusual binding to 5-HT 2A receptors labeled with classic psychedelic5-HT 2A A agonists.
  • the inverse agonist activity of 11-15 may translate to antipsychotic-like activity, as evidenced by the FDA-approved medicine Nuplazid ® (pimavanserin). In conclusion, these compounds have measurable activity at 5-HT 2A receptors.
  • the tested compounds show unique activities at 5-HT 2A receptors, in vitro and in vivo.
  • III-6 shows potent affinity at 5-HT 2A receptors, where it behaved as an agonist.
  • III-6 did not elicit the 5-HT 2A -dependent HTR after PO administration at 10 mg/kg, despite being detected in the brain at concentrations that would be expected to occupy 5- HT 2A receptors to elicit the HTR.
  • this compound might be a non-psychedelic 5-HT 2A agonist.
  • compositions and methods are described in terms of Markush groups or other grouping of alternatives, those skilled in the art will recognize that the compositions and methods are also thereby described in terms of any individual member or subgroup of members of the Markush group or other group.

Landscapes

  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention concerne des composés de tryptamine, et des sels, stéréoisomères, tautomères, solvates, polymorphes ou promédicaments pharmaceutiquement acceptables de ceux-ci, des compositions pharmaceutiques, et dans certains modes de réalisation, des agonistes du récepteur 5-HT2 de la sérotonine et des utilisations dans le traitement de maladies telles que les maladies associées à un récepteur 5-HT2.
PCT/EP2023/073122 2022-08-31 2023-08-23 Composés de tryptamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation WO2024046837A1 (fr)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202263402650P 2022-08-31 2022-08-31
US63/402,650 2022-08-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024046837A1 true WO2024046837A1 (fr) 2024-03-07

Family

ID=87889990

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2023/073122 WO2024046837A1 (fr) 2022-08-31 2023-08-23 Composés de tryptamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024046837A1 (fr)

Citations (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3686213A (en) * 1970-08-28 1972-08-22 American Cyanamid Co Substituted aminoethyl indoles
US5612059A (en) 1988-08-30 1997-03-18 Pfizer Inc. Use of asymmetric membranes in delivery devices
US5798119A (en) 1995-06-13 1998-08-25 S. C. Johnson & Son, Inc. Osmotic-delivery devices having vapor-permeable coatings
WO1999011619A1 (fr) * 1997-09-04 1999-03-11 Merck Sharp & Dohme Limited Derives de phenylindole en tant qu'antagonistes du recepteur 5-ht2a
US7267121B2 (en) 2004-04-20 2007-09-11 Aerogen, Inc. Aerosol delivery apparatus and method for pressure-assisted breathing systems
RU199823U1 (ru) 2020-06-10 2020-09-21 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Центр Передовых Радиационных Медицинских И Биологических Технологий Устройство для лечения бронхолегочных заболеваний
WO2021168082A1 (fr) * 2020-02-18 2021-08-26 Gilgamesh Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tryptamines spécifiques destinées à être utilisées dans le traitement de troubles de l'humeur
WO2021179091A1 (fr) * 2020-03-12 2021-09-16 Bright Minds Biosciences Inc. Dérivés de 3-(2-(aminoéthyl)-indol-4-ol, leurs procédés de préparation et leur utilisation en tant que modulateurs du récepteur 5-ht2
WO2021213358A1 (fr) * 2020-04-21 2021-10-28 江苏先声药业有限公司 Composés contenant du bore et leur application
US20210363104A1 (en) * 2020-05-19 2021-11-25 Cybin Irl Limited Deuterated tryptamine derivatives and methods of use
WO2021234608A1 (fr) * 2020-05-19 2021-11-25 Cybin Irl Limited Dérivés de tryptamine deutérés et procédés d'utilisation
WO2022183287A1 (fr) * 2021-03-02 2022-09-09 Mindset Pharma Inc. Dérivés d'indole utilisés en tant qu'agents sérotoninergiques utiles pour le traitement de troubles associés à ceux-ci
WO2022235927A1 (fr) * 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Gilgamesh Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nouvelles tryptamines et méthodes de traitement de troubles de l'humeur
WO2023028086A1 (fr) * 2021-08-23 2023-03-02 Gilgamesh Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combinaisons d'antagonistes du récepteur 5-ht2a périphérique et d'agonistes du récepteur 5-ht2a central
WO2023115167A1 (fr) * 2021-12-24 2023-06-29 Psylo Pty Ltd Composés

Patent Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3686213A (en) * 1970-08-28 1972-08-22 American Cyanamid Co Substituted aminoethyl indoles
US5612059A (en) 1988-08-30 1997-03-18 Pfizer Inc. Use of asymmetric membranes in delivery devices
US5698220A (en) 1988-08-30 1997-12-16 Pfizer Inc. Asymmetric membranes in delivery devices
US5798119A (en) 1995-06-13 1998-08-25 S. C. Johnson & Son, Inc. Osmotic-delivery devices having vapor-permeable coatings
WO1999011619A1 (fr) * 1997-09-04 1999-03-11 Merck Sharp & Dohme Limited Derives de phenylindole en tant qu'antagonistes du recepteur 5-ht2a
US7267121B2 (en) 2004-04-20 2007-09-11 Aerogen, Inc. Aerosol delivery apparatus and method for pressure-assisted breathing systems
WO2021168082A1 (fr) * 2020-02-18 2021-08-26 Gilgamesh Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tryptamines spécifiques destinées à être utilisées dans le traitement de troubles de l'humeur
WO2021179091A1 (fr) * 2020-03-12 2021-09-16 Bright Minds Biosciences Inc. Dérivés de 3-(2-(aminoéthyl)-indol-4-ol, leurs procédés de préparation et leur utilisation en tant que modulateurs du récepteur 5-ht2
WO2021213358A1 (fr) * 2020-04-21 2021-10-28 江苏先声药业有限公司 Composés contenant du bore et leur application
US20210363104A1 (en) * 2020-05-19 2021-11-25 Cybin Irl Limited Deuterated tryptamine derivatives and methods of use
WO2021234608A1 (fr) * 2020-05-19 2021-11-25 Cybin Irl Limited Dérivés de tryptamine deutérés et procédés d'utilisation
RU199823U1 (ru) 2020-06-10 2020-09-21 Общество С Ограниченной Ответственностью "Центр Передовых Радиационных Медицинских И Биологических Технологий Устройство для лечения бронхолегочных заболеваний
WO2022183287A1 (fr) * 2021-03-02 2022-09-09 Mindset Pharma Inc. Dérivés d'indole utilisés en tant qu'agents sérotoninergiques utiles pour le traitement de troubles associés à ceux-ci
WO2022235927A1 (fr) * 2021-05-05 2022-11-10 Gilgamesh Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Nouvelles tryptamines et méthodes de traitement de troubles de l'humeur
WO2023028086A1 (fr) * 2021-08-23 2023-03-02 Gilgamesh Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Combinaisons d'antagonistes du récepteur 5-ht2a périphérique et d'agonistes du récepteur 5-ht2a central
WO2023115167A1 (fr) * 2021-12-24 2023-06-29 Psylo Pty Ltd Composés

Non-Patent Citations (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design", 1987, AMERICAN PHARMACEUTICAL ASSOCIATION AND PERGAMON PRESS
"Multiparticulate Oral Drug Delivery", 1994, MARCEL DEKKER
"Pharmaceutical Pelletization Technology", 1989, MARCEL DEKKER
ARMSTRONG, J. LCASEY, A. BSARAF, T. SMUKHERJEE, MBOOTH, R. GCANAL, C. E: "S)-5-(2'-Fluorophenyl)-N,N-dimethyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalen-2-amine, a Serotonin Receptor Modulator, Possesses Anticonvulsant, Prosocial, and Anxiolytic-like Properties in an Fmr1 Knockout Mouse Model of Fragile X Syndrome and Autism Spectrum Disorder", ACS PHARMACOL TRANSL SCI, vol. 3, 2020, pages 509 - 523, XP093038570, DOI: 10.1021/acsptsci.9b00101
BUNDGARD, H: "Design of Prodrugs", vol. 21-24, 1985, ELSEVIER, pages: 7 - 9
CANAL C. E., MORGAN, D., FELSING, D., KONDABOLU, K., ROWLAND, N. E., ROBERTSON, K. L.,C. E., MORGAN, D., FELSING, D., KONDABOLU, K: "A Novel Aminotetralin-Type Serotonin (5-HT) (2C) 210 Receptor-Specific Agonist and 5-HT2A Competitive Antagonist/5-HT2B Inverse Agonist with Preclinical Efficacy for Psychoses", JPHARM EXP THER, vol. 349, 2014, pages 533
CANAL, C. E., MORGAN, D.: "Head-twitch response in rodents induced by the hallucinogen 2,5-dimethoxy-4-iodoamphetamine: a comprehensive history, a re-evaluation of mechanisms, and its utility as a model", DRUG TEST ANAL, vol. 4, 2012, pages 556 - 576
CANAL, C. ECORDOVA-SINTJAGO, TLIU, YKIM, M. SMORGAN, DBOOTH, R. G, MOLECULAR PHARMACOLOGY, 2013
FLANAGAN, T. W., SEBASTIAN, M. N., BATTAGLIA, D. M., FOSTER, T.P., MAILLET, E. L.,NICHOLS, C. D: "Activation of 5-HT2 Receptors Reduces i Inflammation in Vascular Tissue and Cholesterol Levels in High-Fat Diet-Fed Apolipoprotein E Knockout Mice", SCI REP, vol. 9, 2019, pages 13444
FLANAGAN, T. WSEBASTIAN, M. NBATTAGLIA, D. MFOSTER, T. PCORMIER, S. ANICHOLS, C. D: "5-HT2 receptor activation alleviates airway inflammation and structural remodeling in a chronic mouse asthma model", LIFE SCI, vol. 236, 2019, pages 116790, XP085873774, DOI: 10.1016/j.lfs.2019.116790
GARCIA-ROMEU, A., DARCY, S., JACKSON, H., WHITE, T., ROSENBERG, P: "In: Current Topics in Behavioral Neurosciences", 2021, SPRINGER, article "Psychedelics as Novel Therapeutics in Alzheimer's Disease: Rationale and Potential Mechanisms"
GOLDBERG, S. B.PACE, B. T.NICHOLAS, C. RRAISON, C. LHUTSON, P. R: "The experimental effects of psilocybin on symptoms of anxiety and depression: A meta-analysis", PSYCHIATRY RES, vol. 284, 2020, pages 112749, XP086027126, DOI: 10.1016/j.psychres.2020.112749
H. HAMISHEHKAR ET AL.: "Recent Advances in Novel Drug Carrier Systems", THE ROLE OF CARRIER IN DRY POWDER INHALER, 2012, pages 39 - 66
HIGUCHI, T ET AL.: "Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems", A.C.S. SYMPOSIUM SERIES, vol. 14
IIDA, KOTARO ET AL.: "Preparation of dry powder inhalation by surface treatment of lactose carrier particles", CHEMICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL BULLETIN, vol. 51, no. 1, 2003, pages 1 - 5, XP001143133, DOI: 10.1248/cpb.51.1
J PHARMACOL EXP THER, vol. 347, pages 705 - 716
JEROME, LFEDUCCIA, A. AWANG, J. BHAMILTON, SYAZAR-KLOSINSKI, BEMERSON, AMITHOEFER, M. CDOBLIN, R: "Long-term follow-up outcomes of MDMA-assisted psychotherapy for treatment of PTSD: a longitudinal pooled analysis of six phase 2 trials", PSYCHOPHARMACOLOGY (BERL), vol. 237, 2020, pages 2485 - 2497, XP037188562, DOI: 10.1007/s00213-020-05548-2
JOHNSON, M. W.HENDRICKS, P. S.BARRETT, F. S.GRIFFITHS, R. R: "Classic psychedelics: An integrative review of epidemiology, therapeutics, mystical experience, and brain network function", PHARMACOL THER, vol. 197, 2019, pages 83 - 102, XP085685213, DOI: 10.1016/j.pharmthera.2018.11.010
KENAKIN, T: "Theoretical Aspects of GPCR-Ligand Complex Pharmacology", CHEM. REV., vol. 117, no. 1, 2017, pages 4 - 20
KENAKIN, TERRY: "A pharmacology primer: techniques for more effective and strategic drug discovery", 2018, ACADEMIC PRESS
KOZLOWSKA, UNICHOLS, CWIATR, KFIGIEL, M: "From psychiatry to neurology: Psychedelics as prospective therapeutics for neurodegenerative disorders", JOURNAL OF NEUROCHEMISTRY, vol. 00, 2021, pages 1 - 20
MARKOPOULOS AINSERRA ADE GREGORIO DGOBBI G: "Evaluating the Potential Use of Serotonergic Psychedelics in Autism Spectrum Disorder", FRONT PHARMACOL, vol. 12, 2022, pages 749068
MORENO, F. A., WIEGAND, C. B., TAITANO, E. K., DELGADO, P.L.: "Safety, tolerability, and efficacy of psilocybin in 9 patients with obsessive- compulsive disorder", J CLIN PSYCHIATRY, vol. 67, 2006, pages 1735 - 1740
NICHOLS, D. E, PSYCHEDELICS, PHARMACOL REV, vol. 68, 2016, pages 264 - 355
NICHOLS, D. EJOHNSON, M. WNICHOLS, C. D: "Psychedelics as Medicines: An Emerging New Paradigm", CLIN PHARMACOL THER, vol. 101, 2017, pages 209 - 219, XP055865261, DOI: 10.1002/cpt.557
REIFF, C. MRICHMAN, E. ENEMEROFF, C. BCARPENTER, L. LWIDGE, A. SRODRIGUEZ, C. IKALIN, N. HMCDONALD, W. M: "Psychedelics and Psychedelic-Assisted Psychotherapy", AM J PSYCHIATRY, vol. 177, 2020, pages 391 - 410
REMINGTON: THE SCIENCE AND PRACTICE OF PHARMACY
SANTUSBAKER, J. CONTROLLED RELEASE, vol. 35, 1995, pages 1 - 21
SARAF, T. SFELSING, D. EARMSTRONG, J. LBOOTH, R. GCANAL, C. E: "Evaluation of lorcaserin as an anticonvulsant in juvenile Fmrl knockout mice", EPILEPSY RES, vol. 175, 2021, pages 106677
SEWELL, R. A., HALPERN,J. H., POPE, H. G., JR: "Response of cluster headache to psilocybin and LSD", I NEUROLOGY, vol. 66, 2006, pages 1920 - 1922, XP008145543, DOI: 10.1212/01.wnl.0000219761.05466.43
SEXTON, J. DNICHOLS, C. DHENDRICKS, P. S: "Population Survey Data Informing the Therapeutic Potential of Classic and Novel Phenethylamine, Tryptamine, and Lysergamide Psychedelics", FRONT PSYCHIATRY, vol. 10, 2019, pages 896
SHULGIN, ALEXANDER THEODOREANN SHULGIN: "TIHKAL: the continuation", vol. 546, 1997, BERKELEY: TRANSFORM PRESS
TAKADA ET AL.: "Encyclopedia of Controlled Drug Delivery", vol. 2, 1999, WILEY
VANN JONES, S.AO'KELLY, A: "Psychedelics as a Treatment for Alzheimer's Disease Dementia", FRONT. SYNAPTIC NEUROSCI, 21 August 2020 (2020-08-21)
VERMA ET AL., DRUG DEVELOPMENT AND INDUSTRIAL PHARMACY, vol. 26, 2000, pages 695 - 708
VERMA ET AL., J. CONTROLLED RELEASE, vol. 126, 2002, pages 7 - 27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20230126298A1 (en) Deuyerated tryptamine derivative formulations and methods of use
US20230312464A1 (en) Therapeutic phenethylamine compositions and methods of use
TW200522944A (en) CB1 modulator compounds
IL298871A (en) The composition consisting of the benzoate salt of 5-methoxy-N,N-dimethyltryptamine
CN101355938A (zh) 取代的酰胺的药学应用
CA3231021A1 (fr) Associations medicamenteuses
JP2021528386A (ja) Ｖｍａｔ２インヒビター化合物、上記化合物に関する組成物および方法
CN109982687A (zh) 联合疗法
WO2018086446A1 (fr) Composé quinazoline substitué ayant une capacité de pénétration de barrière hémato-encéphalique
WO2022243285A1 (fr) Formulations de psilocybine
CN110343090A (zh) 喹唑啉衍生物盐型晶型及制备方法和应用
TW200410685A (en) 2,7-substituted indoles
CA3236624A1 (fr) Formulations d'analogues de psilocybine et procedes d'utilisation
WO2023156453A1 (fr) Dérivés de phénétylamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation
WO2018148262A1 (fr) Composés anti-purinergiques et leurs utilisations
WO2024046837A1 (fr) Composés de tryptamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation
WO2022195011A1 (fr) Analogues de psilocybine, sels, compositions et procédés d'utilisation
WO2024089226A1 (fr) Composés de phénéthylamine, compositions et procédés d'utilisation
WO2023156450A1 (fr) Compositions de phénéthylamine thérapeutique et procédés d'utilisation
WO2023186963A1 (fr) Combinaison d'oxyde nitreux et d'agonistes du récepteur 5-ht2a
WO2019196619A1 (fr) Forme cristalline sous forme de sel dérivée de quinazoline, son procédé de préparation et son utilisation
WO2023135237A1 (fr) Compositions de tryptamine et procédés
WO2019196622A1 (fr) Composé difluoropipéridine substitué en position 5 capable de traverser une barrière hémato-encéphalique
WO2023186867A1 (fr) Procédés d'administration de médicaments psychédéliques par inhalation et systèmes pour mettre en oeuvre ces procédés
AU2022239825A1 (en) Psilocybin analogs, salts, compositions, and methods of use

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23764241

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1